summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
-rw-r--r--.gitattributes3
-rw-r--r--7496.txt9086
-rw-r--r--7496.zipbin0 -> 134350 bytes
-rw-r--r--LICENSE.txt11
-rw-r--r--README.md2
5 files changed, 9102 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/7496.txt b/7496.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a13d867
--- /dev/null
+++ b/7496.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9086 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Jack Ranger's Western Trip, by Clarence Young
+#2 in our series by Clarence Young
+
+Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the
+copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing
+this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook.
+
+This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project
+Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the
+header without written permission.
+
+Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the
+eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is
+important information about your specific rights and restrictions in
+how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a
+donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved.
+
+
+**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts**
+
+**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971**
+
+*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!*****
+
+
+Title: Jack Ranger's Western Trip
+ From Boarding School to Ranch and Range
+
+Author: Clarence Young
+
+Release Date: February, 2005 [EBook #7496]
+[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule]
+[This file was first posted on May 11, 2003]
+
+Edition: 10
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JACK RANGER'S WESTERN TRIP ***
+
+
+
+
+Charles Franks
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: THE THREE RIFLES SOUNDED AS ONE.]
+
+
+
+
+JACK RANGER'S WESTERN TRIP
+
+Or
+
+From Boarding School to Ranch and Range
+
+
+BY
+
+CLARENCE YOUNG
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+CHAPTER
+
+ I. FUN AT WASHINGTON HALL
+ II. JACK IN TROUBLE
+ III. A THREATENING LETTER
+ IV. A LESSON IN CHEMISTRY
+ V. TURNING THE TABLES
+ VI. A PLAN THAT FAILED
+ VII. FOILING A PLOT
+ VIII. THE BURGLAR SCARE
+ IX. NAT'S INVITATION
+ X. A MEETING WITH CHOWDEN
+ XI. A GRAND WIND-UP
+ XII. HO! FOR THE WEST
+ XIII. AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE
+ XIV. PROFESSOR PUNJAB'S TRICK
+ XV. SHOOTING AN OIL WELL
+ XVI. MR. POST'S ADVENTURE
+ XVII. THE WILD STEER
+ XVIII. THE OLD STOCKMAN
+ XIX. A THIEF IN THE NIGHT
+ XX. A STRANGE SEANCE
+ XXI. FINDING ORION TEVIS
+ XXII. JACK HEARS OF HIS FATHER
+ XXIII. ON THE RANCH
+ XXIV. THE OLD MAN
+ XXV. THE COWBOY'S TRICK
+ XXVI. JACK'S WILD RIDE
+ XXVII. THE CATTLE STAMPEDE
+XXVIII. HUNTING MOUNTAIN LIONS
+ XXIX. LOST ON THE MOUNTAIN
+ XXX. A VIEW OF GOLDEN GLOW
+ XXXI. JACK AND NAT PRISONERS
+ XXXII. THE ESCAPE
+XXXIII. DOWN THE SLUICEWAY
+ XXXIV. JACK'S GREAT FIND
+ XXXV. THE ROUND-UP--CONCLUSION
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+FUN AT WASHINGTON HALL
+
+
+"Now then, are you all ready?" inquired a voice in a hoarse whisper.
+
+"Galloping grasshoppers! We're as ready as we ever will be, Jack
+Ranger!" replied one from a crowd of boys gathered on the campus of
+Washington Hall that evening in June.
+
+"Nat Anderson, if you speak again, above a whisper," said Jack
+Ranger, the leader, sternly, "you will have to play 'Marching Through
+Georgia' as a solo on a fine tooth comb seven times without
+stopping!"
+
+"Sneezing snakes! 'Nuff said!" exclaimed Nat, this time in the
+required whisper. "Playing combs always makes my lips tickle."
+
+"Now then, is every one ready?" asked Jack again. "If you are, come
+on, for it's getting late and we'll have to do this job quick and be
+back before Dr. Mead thinks it is time to send Martin the monitor
+after us. Forward march!"
+
+Then the crowd of boys, from the boarding school of Dr. Henry Mead,
+known as Washington Hall, but sometimes called Lakeside Academy, from
+the fact that it was on Rudmore Lake, in the town of Rudmore, started
+forth on mischief bent.
+
+It was Jack Ranger's idea,--any one could have told that. For Jack
+was always up to some trick or other. Most of the tricks were
+harmless, and ended in good-natured fun, for Jack was one of the
+best-hearted lads in the world. This time he had promised his chums
+at the academy something new, though the term, which was within a
+month of closing, had been anything but lacking in excitement.
+
+"Fred Kaler, have you got your mouth organ with you?" asked Jack,
+turning to a lad just behind him.
+
+"He always has his mouth-organ, or how could he speak?" asked an
+athletic looking lad walking beside Jack.
+
+"That's a poor joke, Sam Palmer," commented Jack, and he ducked just
+in time to avoid a playful fist Sam shot out.
+
+"Want me to play?" asked Fred.
+
+"Play? You couldn't play in a hundred years," broke in Nat Anderson,
+Jack's best chum. "But make a noise like music."
+
+"Play yourself, if you're so smart!" retorted Fred.
+
+"Simultaneous Smithereens!" cried Nat, using one of his
+characteristic expressions. "Don't get mad. Go ahead and play."
+
+"Yes, liven things up a bit," went on Jack. "Give us a good marching
+tune. We're far enough off now so none at the Hall can hear us."
+
+Fred blew a lively air and the score of boys behind him began to
+march in step.
+
+"What is it this time?" asked Sam in a low tone, of Jack. "You
+haven't let on a word."
+
+"We're going to administer a deserved rebuke to a certain character
+in this town," Jack answered. "You've heard of Old Smelts, haven't
+you?"
+
+"That fellow who's always beating his wife and hitting his little
+girl?"
+
+"That's the old chap. Well, I heard he just got out of the lock-up
+for being too free with his fists on the little girl. Now if there's
+anything that makes me mad it's to see a kid hurt, girl or boy, it
+doesn't matter. I've got a surprise in store for Mr. Smelts."
+
+"What is it?"
+
+"You've heard of the Klu-Klux-Klan, I suppose?"
+
+"You mean that southern society that made such a stir during the
+Civil War?"
+
+"That's the one. We're going to be Klu-Klux-Klaners to-night."
+
+"But we haven't got any uniforms."
+
+"You'll find them in yonder wood!" exclaimed Jack in tragic tones,
+and he pointed to a clump of trees just ahead.
+
+"What's this, amateur theatricals?" asked Nat, catching the last
+words.
+
+"Maybe," replied Jack. "Now Fred you can pay off your orchestra," he
+added. "I want to do a little monologue."
+
+The boys crowded around Jack, and he told them what he had related to
+Sam.
+
+"I have provided the necessary uniforms to enable us to take the part
+of Klu-Klux-Klaners," he said. "Old Smelts is a southerner and knows
+the significance of the thing. We'll throw a good scare into him, and
+maybe he'll let his wife and daughter alone. Now we're to put on the
+sheets and the tall white helmets, and you leave the rest to me. Do
+just as I do when we get to Smelts's house."
+
+"Hemispheres and hot handkerchiefs!" exclaimed Nat. "This is going
+some!"
+
+Jack went to the foot of a big hollow tree, from which he pulled a
+large bundle. This he opened and showed a number of ghostly uniforms.
+He distributed these among the boys, who at once donned them, making
+a weird looking band in the little glade.
+
+"Every one stand still until I put the finishing touches on,"
+commanded Jack.
+
+With a bottle of phosphorous he outlined waving flame lines around
+the holes cut for eyes, nose, and mouth on each white-shrouded
+figure,
+
+"Now we're ready," announced the leader. "Smelts's house is just
+beyond this wood. Follow me, and, Fred, when you see me put my hand
+on my head that means I want slow tremulous music, like they have in
+the theater when, the heroine is dying."
+
+"Your wishes shall be obeyed," spoke Fred, in hollow tones, whereat
+the others laughed.
+
+"Silence!" commanded Jack.
+
+It was a good thing those in charge of Washington Hall could not see
+the pupils just then. If they had the prank would have cost the
+participators dear. But, after all, as Jack said, it was in a good
+cause. On they went until their leader held up a warning hand.
+
+"Arrange yourselves in a circle about me," he whispered. "I am going
+to beard the lion in his den."
+
+He walked up to a small cottage that stood some distance from any
+other dwellings on a lonely street in the village, and knocked
+loudly.
+
+"Who's there?" came a voice, in answer, a few seconds later from an
+upper window.
+
+"Tobias Smelts, come forth!" called Jack in deep tones. "We would hold
+speech with thee!"
+
+The boys could see a man thrust his head further out of the casement.
+
+"Come forth and linger not!" called Jack.
+
+"Oh! Oh! It's the Klu-Kluxers! It's the Klan! They're after me!"
+exclaimed Smelts. "Oh, what shall I do?"
+
+"Come forth if ye would not have us drag ye out!" cried Jack. "We
+have business with thee!"
+
+"What'll I do?" wailed Tobias.
+
+"Better go 'fore they come in here after ye," a woman's voice could
+be heard to say. "Remember what they did to Pete Baker in South
+Caroliny!"
+
+The head was drawn in, with many a groan.
+
+"Get ready, he's coming," whispered Jack.
+
+A few minutes later a very much frightened man, clad in his shirt and
+trousers came out on the front steps, around which the boys in their
+ghostly disguise were gathered.
+
+"Advance!" commanded Jack, and Tobias, his knees trembling, walked on
+until he stood in the midst of the frolicking students.
+
+"Bind him to the stake!" commanded the leader.
+
+A small, pointed stake had been prepared and with a hammer it was
+driven into the ground. Then the man was fastened to it with several
+coils of clothes line.
+
+"Now the faggots!" said Jack, and the boys dropped some pieces of
+wood at the victims feet. A second later Jack had emptied the phial
+of phosphorous over the wood, and the lurid light shone forth.
+
+"They're burning me alive!" yelled Tobias. "Save me!"
+
+"This is the fate dealt out to all who beat their wives and
+children!" chanted Jack. At the same time he raised his hand to his
+head and Fred played tremulous music on the harmonica, lending a
+weirdness to the scene.
+
+"Please don't kill me, good Mr. Klu-Klux-Klan men," begged Tobias.
+"I'll never do it again. I promise you I never will!"
+
+"Do you promise by the great seal of the United States?" inquired
+Jack, in sepulchral accents.
+
+"Yes, Oh yes; I'll promise anything!"
+
+"'Tis well! This was but the first trial by fire. The next time will
+be more severe!" and with that Jack kicked aside the phosphorous
+covered sticks and signaled to those holding the ends of the ropes to
+loosen them.
+
+Tremblingly Tobias crawled into the house.
+
+"Be ye dead, Tobias?" asked his frightened wife, yet she was not a
+little gratified that her husband had made the promise the mysterious
+visitors exacted.
+
+"Jest about," was the answer. "Oh, this is a terrible night!"
+
+"Hence, my brave men," spoke Jack solemnly. "We have work elsewhere.
+But remember, Tobias Smelts, if thou dost so much as raise a finger
+to a woman or child we shall hear of it through our ghostly messengers
+and will visit thee again."
+
+"I'll be good! Oh, I'll be good!" promised Tobias.
+
+Then at a nod from Jack the white-robed figures filed away into the
+darkness, Fred playing a dirge.
+
+"Say, that was the best sport yet," said Sam, when they were at a
+safe distance.
+
+"Yes, and it was a good thing," said Jack. "That old codger'll not
+beat his wife any more, I reckon."
+
+And it might be said in passing that he did not for a while. The
+visit of the masquerading Klu-Klux-Klan was a most effective remedy,
+and the whole village wondered what had cured Tobias temporarily at
+least, of his bad habit.
+
+"Say, but you're all right," remarked Bob Movel to Jack, as the boys
+rid themselves of the costumes in the woods a little later.
+
+"Towering tadpoles! I should say he was!" exclaimed Nat. "What will
+you do next?"
+
+"I guess we'd better be getting back to the Hall," said Jack.
+"Professor Grimm might take a notion to sit up late and spot us."
+
+While the boys were slipping quietly back to their rooms, having
+enjoyed a night's fun, which also had its useful side, we may take
+this opportunity of introducing them more formally to the reader.
+
+Those who read the first volume of this series, entitled "Jack
+Ranger's Schooldays; Or, The Rivals of Washington Hall," need not be
+told how it was that our hero and his friends came to be at that seat
+of learning. Jack was a bright American lad, who lived with his three
+maiden aunts, Josephine, Mary and Angeline Stebbins, in the village
+of Denton. Jack was to inherit some money when he became of age, but
+the conditions under which it was to come, as well as the secret of
+who his father was, bothered him not a little.
+
+In the first volume of the series I told of his life in Denton, and
+the lively times he and Nat Anderson had before they were sent to the
+Academy. There things were even more lively, and there occurs a sort
+of sequel to a strange occurrence that happened in Jack's town.
+
+At Denton, one night, Jack saw a man rob a jewelry store, but the
+only thing he took, as it developed, was a strange ring. It was one
+with a big moss agate, with the outline of a pine tree on it, and a
+lot of emeralds and rubies set around its center. This ring belonged
+to Jack's aunts, who had sent it to the jeweler's and when Jack told
+his relatives of the theft, and described the appearance of the man,
+they were much excited. However, they would tell him nothing.
+
+At the academy, after many other adventures, including aiding and
+abetting the fighting of a mock duel between Professor Garlach, the
+German teacher, and Professor Socrat, the French instructor, Jack
+made the acquaintance of one John Smith, a half-breed Indian who had
+come to the academy for instruction. John had considerable Indian
+blood in his veins, as he proved on more than one occasion.
+Nevertheless, he and Jack Ranger became great chums.
+
+One day John Smith disappeared. His friends found that his room had
+been entered at the school, and there were evidences of a hurried
+search having been made. Nat discovered, in John's absence, a curious
+ring under a steam radiator. It was the exact counterpart of the one
+the burglar stole in Denton. Jack was much puzzled at this, and more,
+when it developed that John had been kidnapped by some mysterious
+men. At last the semi-Indian lad was saved by Jack and Nat.
+
+John Smith told Jack as much of the secret as he knew. It appeared
+that his father had given him the ring just before his death, and
+told him if he was ever poor or in trouble to take it to a man named
+Orion Tevis, and state who the bearer was.
+
+Some time before that, the elder Smith had been in Oregon and Tevis
+came to him to get him to be a guide to a wild forest country in the
+far north. There he had bought five thousand acres of valuable land.
+Some schemers had stolen the papers connected with it and were making
+for the place, to take possession first, as that would give them a
+sort of title.
+
+Tevis was too sick to make the journey himself, and got Smith to go
+with some of his own companions. John's father took a man named Clark
+and one called Roberts with him. Mr. Roberts, or Robert Ranger, which
+was his real name, was Jack's father. Because of some strange
+circumstances he had not seen his son in many years.
+
+Roberts, for so he was known many years, Clark, and Smith succeeded
+in claiming the land for Tevis. He gave them each ten thousand
+dollars for their work and had three rings made as mementoes. They
+were like the one stolen from the jewelry store.
+
+In addition Tevis said that at any time the men or their relatives
+needed his help they could have it.
+
+Clark, later, was killed, John Smith's father retired on his little
+fortune and Jack's father got into trouble. It seemed that the land
+schemers offered him a large sum to help them contest Tevis's title.
+He refused, but learned that, if they could get him into court, they
+could throw the timber claim into litigation, and force Tevis to pay
+a large sum to compromise. Rather than do this Roberts told Smith he
+would become a wanderer over the earth.
+
+Mr. Ranger sent his money to his sisters, Jack's aunts, for the use
+of his son, and then disappeared. He knew that if he could evade
+legal service for eleven years he would be free, and that was why he
+never sought to see his boy or sisters.
+
+The Indian student believed that the man who stole Jack's aunts'
+ring, and those men who made an unsuccessful attempt to get his,
+thought they could, by use of the emblems send two boys, pretending
+to be Jack and John to Tevis, and get a lot of money from him.
+
+John Smith's only knowledge of Tevis was that his address could be
+secured from the Capital Bank, at Denver, Colorado, and that he was
+somewhere in the Rocky Mountains, in retirement. Jack having heard
+this story, resolved that he and John Smith, would, some day, go in
+search of Mr. Ranger. However, Jack's aunts said he must finish his
+term at the academy, and this time was nearly up.
+
+The students returning from their adventure were now approaching
+Washington Hall, and walking quietly along. Jack and John Smith were
+in the lead, and the others were strung out behind them.
+
+Suddenly around a bend in the road there swung a big touring
+automobile. No lights were on it, and only for the subdued roar of
+the motor the car's approach would not have been noticed. As it was,
+Jack did not see it until it was almost upon him.
+
+"Look out!" cried John Smith suddenly.
+
+At the same time he sprang forward and pushed Jack to one side. To do
+this he had to get almost in the path of the car, and was struck by
+one of the projecting springs. He was knocked to one side, but not
+before he had pushed Jack out of harm's way, the latter being hit
+only a glancing blow.
+
+"Why don't you look where you're going?" called an angry voice, as
+the car sped on.
+
+"Are you hurt, John?" cried Jack, springing to pick up his friend.
+
+"No, only bruised. They have nerve to go running without lights and
+then ask us where we're going. I wonder who they were."
+
+"I have an idea." said Jack. "That voice sounded like Adrian
+Bagot's."
+
+"What, that sporty new student?"
+
+"That's who."
+
+"Well, he'd better go a bit slow, I'm thinking."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+JACK IN TROUBLE
+
+
+The boys crowded around Jack and John, anxious to know if they were
+hurt. All were loud in their indignation when they learned what had
+happened.
+
+"Let's pay that snob back!" suggested Dick Balmore.
+
+"Make him sleep with you one night," suggested Fred, for Dick was so
+tall and thin that he had been christened "Bony" by his chums.
+
+"Dry up!" exclaimed Dick. "I'd rather be thin than a wandering
+minstrel like you."
+
+"Easy now!" suggested Jack. "No noise, we are too near quarters.
+Ouch! I think I've sprained my ankle, or that auto did it for me."
+
+He tried to walk but had to limp, and was forced to accept the aid of
+Sam and John, on whose arms he leaned. In this manner he entered the
+Hall just as the monitor was closing up for the night. The other boys
+slipped to their rooms, but Jack had to be helped upstairs.
+
+As the trio were passing through the corridors they met Professor
+Grimm. Now, Mr. Grimm was an old enemy of Jack's, since Jack had once
+caught him smoking, a violation of the school rules.
+
+"Ha! More skylarking!" the instructor exclaimed. "What does this
+mean, Ranger?"
+
+"I sprained my ankle," replied our hero.
+
+"What are you doing out at this hour? And what are the others doing?"
+
+"We had permission to go to the village," replied Jack, truthfully
+enough, for Dr. Mead had allowed the boys to go; though the object of
+the trip, of course, had not been disclosed to the master.
+
+"Go to your rooms," commanded Professor Grimm. "I will look into
+this."
+
+"I wish he hadn't seen us," said Jack, when his two chums had taken
+him to his dormitory.
+
+"Why?" asked Sam. "Where's the harm?"
+
+"I have a sort of queer feeling that something is going to happen,"
+Jack replied. "I want to finish out the term with a good record, for
+my aunts' sakes. If there are any pranks played tonight, Grimm will
+be sure to suspect me."
+
+"Don't cross a bridge until it trips you up," said Sam. "Now, let's
+have a look at that ankle."
+
+They found it was not as bad as Jack had feared.
+
+"I've got a bottle of arnica somewhere," he said. "I think I'll put
+some on."
+
+His chums found the bottle, and were rubbing the swelling with the
+medicine when there came a knock at the door.
+
+"Who's there?" asked Jack.
+
+"Professor Grimm," was the reply. "I want to see if you are really in
+your room."
+
+Sam opened the door and the cross-grained professor entered.
+
+"So you're not fooling this time, eh?" he sneered, as he smelled the
+arnica and saw the swelling on Jack's ankle. "It's a good thing you
+were not."
+
+"Nice old party, isn't he?" murmured Sam, when the teacher had
+withdrawn. "Well, I think I'll say good-night, Jack. Hope you sleep
+good. Say, but that Klu-Klux business was the limit!" and chuckling
+over the night's fun, he went to bed, leaving Jack and the Indian
+student together.
+
+"A few weeks more and we'll not have to sneak around this way to have
+a little fun," said Jack. "Vacation will soon be here. I hope I can
+carry out a plan I have in mind, John."
+
+"What is it, Jack?"
+
+"I want to go out west and search for my father. I ought to be with
+him in his trouble. Besides, the time must be almost up, so he could
+come back to civilization again."
+
+"I hope you do find him," said the semi-Indian.
+
+"I wish you could help me, John."
+
+"I wish so, too. Perhaps I can. But you'd better get to bed now. We
+don't want Grimm coming around again."
+
+Jack fell asleep dreaming he was crawling through a deep canyon after
+his father, who was being carried away captive in a birch bark canoe
+by Indians. But in spite of this he slept so soundly that he did not
+hear a number of unusual noises under his window. Perhaps it was as
+well for his peace of mind that he did not.
+
+It was about half past seven o'clock the next morning when Jack awoke
+with a start.
+
+"I wonder what's the matter," he said to himself. "It seems as if
+something had happened. Oh, I know, I haven't heard the morning
+bell."
+
+It was the custom at the academy to awaken the students by ringing
+the big bell in the tower every morning, and Jack had come to depend
+on it as a sort of alarm clock.
+
+"I wonder what's the matter," he went on. "Can Martin have forgotten
+to sound the tocsin? It's the first time he ever slipped up."
+
+A little later there came the sound of persons moving in the hall,
+and then voices could be heard calling one to the other.
+
+He got out of bed, finding that his ankle was much better and looked
+from the window. There was nothing out of the ordinary to be seen. He
+turned toward his door, just as a loud knock came on the portal.
+
+"Who's there?" he asked.
+
+"Martin, the monitor," was the reply. "Dr. Mead wants to see you at
+once in the office."
+
+"Trouble! I knew it!" exclaimed Jack to himself. "Well, I wonder what
+it is now. Hope word of that Klu-Klux-Klan business hasn't reached
+here already. But I'm not afraid of that. Even Dr. Mead will admit we
+acted from a right motive. All right, Martin," he called. "I'll be
+there as soon as I dress. Anything special?"
+
+"I'm afraid it is," replied the monitor, as he hurried down the hall.
+
+Jack made a hasty toilet and then went to the office of the head of
+the academy. He found a number of the teachers gathered there,
+including Professor Grimm, who looked more angry than usual. The
+latter was speaking as Jack entered:
+
+"This positively has to stop, Dr. Mead," he said. "I will put up with
+this no longer. Either Ranger or I must leave."
+
+"What have I done now?" asked Jack.
+
+"Something more serious than usual, Ranger, if it turns out that you
+are guilty," answered Dr. Mead.
+
+"Of course he's guilty," burst out Mr. Grimm. "Haven't I proof?"
+
+"Last night," said Dr. Mead, speaking slowly and sternly, "the big
+bell was taken from the tower. It was carried and placed in front of
+Professor Grimm's room, and tied to his door so that when he opened
+it the bell was pulled into his room. In this way some valuable sea
+shells he had on the floor were broken."
+
+"What makes you think I did it?" asked Jack. "I was laid up with a
+sprained ankle."
+
+"That's just how I know it was you and some of your chums," cried
+Professor Grimm. "Tied on the bell, where it had been used, so the
+sharp edge would not cut one's fingers, was this rag. There it is.
+Smell of it. What does it smell like?" and he thrust it under Jack's
+nose.
+
+"Why--why--it smells like arnica," replied our hero, wondering what
+was coming next.
+
+"Arnica! Yes, I guess it does. What was it you were pretending to put
+on your ankle last night, Ranger? Arnica, wasn't it? Of course it
+was. I've caught you this time! The evidence is all against you! You
+didn't think you dropped that rag, and that the arnica would figure
+in the evidence. Dr. Grimm, I repeat, Ranger must leave or I shall!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+A THREATENING LETTER
+
+
+For a few seconds there was a silence following Professor Grimm's
+ultimatum. Jack was so surprised he did not know what reply to make.
+The suddenness of the accusation, with the experience of the night
+before, and the upset over his sprained ankle, combined to make him
+hesitate before he made answer.
+
+"What have you to say, Ranger?" asked Dr. Mead, in a sterner voice
+than he had ever before used toward Jack. "I know you will tell the
+truth, for I have never yet known you to lie. But I must tell you
+that if I find that you are guilty it will go hard with you this
+time. I have put up with a good deal from the students, but this is
+too much."
+
+"I--I don't know what to say, sir," replied Jack, in a sort of daze.
+"I'm not guilty, I can assure you of that!"
+
+"It's one thing to say so and another to prove it," snapped Professor
+Grimm. "The evidence is all against you."
+
+"It's all circumstantial," interrupted Jack.
+
+"But rather conclusive," went on the irate professor. He detailed how
+he had seen Jack and his friends out late, how he had come upon them
+using arnica, and mentioned some of their pranks in the past,
+including the mock duel arranged between Professor Socrat the French
+teacher and Professor Garlach, the German instructor.
+
+"I admit I have played pranks in the past," said Jack frankly, "but
+I'm not guilty this time. All I ask is a chance to prove that I had
+no hand in this."
+
+"You don't deserve a chance!" exclaimed Mr. Grimm.
+
+"That's hardly fair," spoke Jack indignantly.
+
+"Don't talk back to me!" burst out the angry teacher.
+
+"I think your request is a fair one, Ranger," went on Dr. Mead. "I
+will give you twenty-four hours in which to prove that you had no
+hand in this. That is all now; you may go."
+
+Dr. Mead was a man of few words, but Jack knew he would be absolutely
+fair. So, bowing to the head of the school, and without a glance at
+his accuser, Jack left the office.
+
+"Whew!" exclaimed the youth, as he got outside. "I seem to be up
+against it harder than ever. Twenty-four hours to prove something
+that may take a week. Well, I've got to get busy, that's all."
+
+"Hello!" exclaimed a voice as Jack was walking along the corridor
+toward his room. "Whasmatternow? Betcher Ic'nguess!" and the voice
+evolved itself into a good-natured looking lad, who stretched a big
+wad of gum from his mouth, and slowly got it back again by the simple
+but effective process of winding it about his tongue.
+
+"Hello, Budge Rankin!" exclaimed Jack, as he saw the queer, bright
+lad who had lived near him in Denton, and for whom Jack had secured
+the place of second janitor at the school. "So you think you know
+what the trouble is?"
+
+"Betcherlife," replied Budge, who had a habit of running his words
+together, a habit which his gum-chewing did not tend to relieve.
+
+"What is it?"
+
+"Accused you takin' that bell," went on Budge more slowly. "Hu!
+Wanterbe a detective?"
+
+"How did you know it?" asked Jack, a little surprised at Budge's
+remark.
+
+"Easy. Heard 'em talk. Transom open," was his answer.
+
+"What do you mean about me turning detective?"
+
+"Lookerthis," Budge said, quickly holding out a small object to Jack.
+"Found it in Grimm's room, 'sIsweptout."
+
+"You found it in Mr. Grimm's room as you swept it out?" inquired
+Jack, not certain he had heard aright.
+
+"'Smatter!" exclaimed Budge, that being his short-hand way of stating
+that was what was the matter.
+
+"A spark plug from an automobile," mused Jack. "Well, that doesn't
+seem to give me much of a clue."
+
+"Gotermobe?" asked Budge.
+
+"No, of course I haven't an automobile," replied Jack.
+
+"Knowoas?"
+
+"Do I know who has? Why--By Jove! I believe I see what you mean. Say,
+it's lucky you found this. I'll turn detective for awhile now. I
+wonder how this got into Grimm's room."
+
+"Rolled under door, I guess," replied Budge, speaking more rationally
+as he threw away his cud of gum. "From hall, maybe."
+
+"That's it!" exclaimed Jack. "I see it now. Thanks Budge. I hope I
+succeed. I'm much obliged to you."
+
+"'Sallright!" exclaimed Budge, as he hurried away to attend to some
+of his duties.
+
+When Jack got back to his room he found quite a gathering of his
+chums there.
+
+"In for it on account of that Klu-Klux business?" asked Sam Chalmers.
+
+"Not exactly that," answered Jack, "though if I'd stayed at home It
+wouldn't have happened."
+
+"Ha-ha-ha-has it g-g-gg-got anything t-t-t--" began Will Slade.
+
+"Whistle it!" exclaimed Bony Balmore.
+
+"Sing it!" came from Fred Kaler. "Here I'll help you out," and he
+began to play on his harmonica.
+
+"Whole-wheat-whangdoodles!" cried Nat Anderson, "but tell us, Jack.
+Don't keep us in suspense."
+
+"It's the bell," said Jack. "I'm accused of taking it down and
+putting it in Grimm's room. They found a rag with arnica on it near
+the ding-dong, and Old Grimm jumped to the wrong conclusion, basing
+his belief on what he saw here last night in the first-aid-to-the-
+injured line. I've got until to-morrow to prove that I didn't do it."
+
+"We can prove it easily enough," said Sam.
+
+"Not so easily as you think," spoke Jack. "Grimm saw us out late, you
+remember, and if all of you joined in saying it wasn't I who did it,
+they wouldn't believe you. I guess they want to make an example of
+someone. No sir, I'm going to do some sleuthing on my own hook. I've
+got a good line and a bit of evidence to start with. I'm pretty sure
+I can make some folks around here sit up and take notice about this
+time to-morrow."
+
+"Good for you, Jack!" exclaimed Dick. "If you want any help call on
+us!"
+
+"Thanks," replied Jack. "Now I guess we'd better get ready for
+breakfast."
+
+His chums left him to complete his dressing, and, when they were
+gone, Jack carefully laid aside the spark plug Budge had given him.
+
+"First link," he said.
+
+During the noon intermission Jack had a short but earnest talk with
+Socker, the school janitor. The latter nodded his head vigorously
+several times during the conversation.
+
+"I'll get it for you," he said as he and Jack parted.
+
+At the close of school that afternoon the janitor went to Jack's room
+with a large bundle.
+
+"Any trouble?" asked our hero.
+
+"Not a bit," replied Socker. "He was out and I found it rolled up in
+a corner, just where he had thrown it. He hasn't even cleaned it."
+
+"So much the better," said Jack, as he gave Socker a small sum of
+money. "I'll keep quiet about this, don't worry."
+
+"I hope you will," the janitor went on. "It's against the rules for
+me to do what I did, but I want to oblige you, and have you come out
+all right."
+
+"Which I think I will," Jack added.
+
+When he was alone he opened the bundle Socker had brought. It was a
+linen duster, and, as Jack saw several brown spots on it he uttered
+an exclamation of satisfaction.
+
+With his knife he scraped some substance from the garment, and placed
+the particles in a test tube. Then, taking this with him, he went to
+the laboratory, where he remained for some time.
+
+Late that afternoon Jack, who had avoided his chums, took a walk
+around the campus. As he came near a small building, where some of
+the students kept their motor cycles, one or two small automobile
+runabouts, and a few of the more well-to-do, their ponies, Jack
+assumed a slow and halting gait. He seemed to be limping from the
+effects of his sprained ankle.
+
+"I wonder if he's around," he muttered to himself. "Socker said he
+was going to take a spin this afternoon, and it's about time for him
+to start, by all accounts."
+
+As Jack neared the entrance to the combined garage and stable he saw
+a group of students approaching from an opposite direction. His limp
+became more decided than before.
+
+"He's there!" he said softly to himself.
+
+"Hello, Ranger!" exclaimed a number, as Jack passed them. He knew
+them fairly well, but was not intimate with them as they belonged to
+the "fast set," a good-enough crowd, but lads who had more spending
+money than was good for them.
+
+"Hello!" called Jack in reply.
+
+"What's the matter?" came several inquiries as the students noticed
+Jack's limp.
+
+"Turned on my ankle," was the reply. "A bit stiff yet."
+
+The crowd had nearly passed by this time, and, owing to the fact that
+Jack had the middle of the sidewalk, and did not turn to one side,
+the little group separated. Some went on one side, and some on the
+other. Just as Jack came opposite a tall, elaborately dressed youth,
+he seemed to stumble. To save himself from falling Jack threw out his
+hand and caught the tall student on the wrist. As he did so the well-
+dressed youth uttered a cry.
+
+"Clumsy! You hurt my sore wrist!"
+
+"I beg your pardon!" exclaimed Jack, struggling to recover his
+balance, but still keeping his hold of the other's hand. "Awfully
+careless of me!"
+
+There was quite a little jostling among the students, several trying
+to help Jack recover his balance. Then Jack straightened up.
+
+"I'm all right now," he said. "I bore down on it a little too hard."
+
+He limped on, thrusting one hand hurriedly into his pocket. As he did
+so, the tall student cried.
+
+"There! I've lost the rag off my sore wrist! I sprained it cranking
+my auto yesterday."
+
+Several of his companions began a search for it, but as Jack hurried
+on, as fast as he could, while still pretending to limp painfully he
+said to himself:
+
+"I guess you'll look a long while, Adrian Bagot, before you find that
+rag. Maybe I can get even with you for running me down last night,"
+and Jack pulled a piece of cloth from his pocket and smelled of it.
+
+"That's the evidence!" he exclaimed, as he turned down a side street.
+
+Whether it was this change, or whether it was because his ankle
+suddenly healed, was not in evidence, but Jack began to walk with
+scarcely the semblance of a halt in his step as soon as he was out of
+sight of the students.
+
+The lad hurried back to his room. There he spent a busy half hour,
+poring over some books on chemistry. He got several test tubes, and
+his apartment took on the appearance of a laboratory, while many
+strange smells filled the air.
+
+While Jack was engaged in pouring the contents of one test tube into
+another there came a knock at his door.
+
+"Who's there?" he called.
+
+"It's me, Sam," was the reply.
+
+"Say, Sam, excuse me, but I can't let you in," Jack answered. "I'm
+working on something that I can't leave. I may have a surprise for
+you in the morning."
+
+"All right," Sam answered. "Here's some mail, that's all. I'll shove
+it under the door."
+
+There was a rustling of paper and several letters came beneath the
+portal. Jack laid aside his test tube and gathered them up. One was
+from his aunts at home, another from Judge Bennetty regarding the
+payment of certain bills Jack had contracted, while the third was in
+unfamiliar handwriting.
+
+"I wonder who that's from," said Jack. "The best way to find out is
+to open it."
+
+He ripped the envelope down, and, as he did so, a piece of paper
+fluttered to the ground. Picking the missive up, Jack read:
+
+"It's a long lane that has no turns. I'll get even with you for
+having me suspended and sent away from the Hall. My time will come
+yet.
+
+"Jerry Chowden."
+
+"Jerry Chowden," murmured Jack. "So he's trying to scare me, eh? Well
+I guess he'll find I don't scare."
+
+Jack slowly folded the letter and placed it back in the envelope. He
+glanced at the postmark, and saw it was stamped "Chicago."
+
+"Wonder how he got out there," he mused. "Well, I'm glad he's far
+away," and he gave little more thought to the matter of the bully, a
+nephew of Professor Grimm's, whose vain attempt to cast disgrace on
+Jack, in the matter of painting a pipe on the professor's portrait,
+had rebounded on his own head. He had been suspended for two months
+for the escapade, which Jack was accused of, but which our hero
+managed to prove himself innocent of, and, since leaving the Hall,
+nothing had been heard of him.
+
+"Maybe I'll meet him if I get out west on that strange hunt of mine,"
+thought Jack, as he went on with his chemical tests.
+
+He worked far into the night, and when he put out his light he said
+to himself:
+
+"I think I've got things just where I want them."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+A LESSON IN CHEMISTRY
+
+
+Jack was awakened next morning by a knock on his door.
+
+"Who's there?" he asked.
+
+"Martin, the monitor," was the reply. "Dr, Mead wishes to see you at
+once."
+
+"Great Scott! I've overslept!" exclaimed Jack, as he jumped out of
+bed and saw it was after eight o'clock. "No wonder, being up half the
+night. Tell Dr. Mead I'm sorry and I'll be right down," he went on.
+
+Jack almost made a record for dressing, and went to Dr. Mead's
+office, where he found the same gathering that had confronted him the
+previous morning.
+
+"Well, Ranger," began the head of the school, "the time you asked for
+has expired. Have you anything to say?"
+
+"I have, sir," replied Jack. "But first I would like to request that
+this hearing be adjourned to the laboratory. I also request that Sam
+Chalmers, Dick Balmore, Fred Kaler, Budge Rankin and Adrian Bagot be
+summoned."
+
+"Do you accuse all of them?" asked Dr. Mead, in some astonishment.
+
+"I accuse no one," Jack replied. "I want to make a demonstration, and
+let the facts speak for themselves."
+
+"This is all nonsense!" exclaimed Professor Grimm. "This boy is
+guilty and he knows it. He is only seeking to delay matters. I demand
+his expulsion!"
+
+"I think it only fair to grant his request," said Dr. Mead.
+"Professor Gales, will you kindly summon the students mentioned.
+Professor Hall, please see that the laboratory is opened."
+
+In a few minutes Jack was leading the way to the latter room. He
+carried several bundles, while Socker, the janitor, bore a rack of
+test tubes he had taken from Jack's room. The lads mentioned
+attended, wondering what had happened.
+
+"What's this all about?" demanded Adrian, haughtily. "I haven't had
+my breakfast yet."
+
+"The time was up an hour ago," said Dr. Mead sharply, glancing at the
+new student, who seemed disposed to take life as easily as possible.
+
+"May I speak?" asked Jack, of Dr. Mead.
+
+"Since you are the accused it is but fair that you be given a chance
+to clear yourself," was the reply. "But as you have given a certain
+publicity to this matter, I shall tell these other students what it
+is all about."
+
+Dr. Mead then explained the charge against Jack. There was an uneasy
+movement among the other boys, and Adrian Bagot was seen to shift
+about. He even started to walk around as though to leave the room,
+but the monitor stood at the door and Adrian did not want to make any
+confusion by forcing past him. So young Bagot remained in the
+laboratory.
+
+"When Professor Grimm accused me of playing this trick I denied it,
+as I am innocent," Jack said, when Dr. Mead had finished and looked
+at him as if inviting him to speak. "Perhaps if the matter has been
+made public the fellows who took the bell would have come forward and
+admitted it. As it is I asked twenty-four hours to prove that I did
+not do it. I believe I have succeeded.
+
+"In the first place," Jack went on, "I wish to exhibit this garment,"
+and he held up to view a long linen coat, commonly called a duster.
+"You will observe," he went on, "that there are several brown lines
+on it. I have measured these and they are exactly the shape and size
+that would be made by the sharp rim of a bell, if it was rested on
+the garment when some one was wearing it."
+
+"You will have to have better evidence than that," sneered Professor
+Grimm.
+
+"I think I will have," announced Jack quietly. "Of course those marks
+might have been made by any sharp, rusty object. Now the bell metal
+rusts scarcely at all, but the iron clapper of a bell does. The rust
+from that runs down inside a bell, and gets on the edges. I took some
+iron rust from the clapper of the stolen bell and placed it in a test
+tube. I assumed, for the purpose of experimenting, that I did not
+know that it was iron rust, but only suspected it. I applied the
+proper chemical tests, and I got the results that showed me there was
+iron present in the test tube. Here, I will show you."
+
+Jack mixed a few chemicals and soon the brown mixture in the tube
+turned red.
+
+"That is from the bell clapper," the young chemist went on. "Here is
+a solution made from scraping the lines on the duster. I will apply
+the test and see what happens."
+
+While the others looked on anxiously Jack dropped some of the mixture
+into the second tube. In an instant it turned red.
+
+"There!" exclaimed Jack, holding up the two tubes, side by side. "The
+same color coming in both mixtures from the same strength of
+chemicals that I used, shows that the iron rust on the duster and
+that on the bell clapper are the same."
+
+"What does that prove, except that you might have worn the duster?"
+asked Dr. Mead.
+
+"That is all, as yet," Jack admitted. "But I will prove that the
+duster is not mine, and that I never wore it. I have something else
+here," he went on.
+
+From among a pile of things on the laboratory table Jack took a white
+object, with brown spots. Walking rapidly across the room he handed
+it to Adrian.
+
+"The rag off my sprained wrist!" exclaimed the sporty student. "Where
+did--"
+
+Then he stopped, seeming to realize he had said too much.
+
+"I will ask Professor Grimm to smell of that," Jack continued,
+thrusting the rag under the teacher's nose.
+
+"Arnica!" exclaimed the instructor. "The same that you used, and
+which enabled me to discover it was you who played the trick."
+
+"It is arnica," Jack admitted, "but it happens I was not the only one
+who used it that night. I have also to show this article, which was
+picked up in your room, Professor Grimm," and Jack extended the spark
+plug Budge had given him.
+
+"Ha! What is that?" asked Mr. Grimm.
+
+"It is some part of an automobile," Dr. Mead said. "Who, of our
+students, has one. Ah! I begin to see," he added.
+
+"Adrian Bagot, I will return your duster to you," Jack went on,
+walking forward and passing the rust-stained automobile garment to
+young Bagot. "I had to borrow it from your room, but I am through
+with it now. You may also have your spark plug, and this rag I had to
+take from your wrist rather unceremoniously last night."
+
+"You're a thief!" burst out Adrian, but Jack stopped him with a
+gesture.
+
+"I'll not take that from you or any one else," exclaimed Jack. "Dr.
+Mead," he went on, "I ask that you inquire of my friends, Sam
+Chalmers, Dick Balmore and Fred Kaler when they last saw Adrian in
+his auto."
+
+"When did you?" Dr. Mead asked the boys.
+
+"The night the bell was stolen," answered Sam, and the others agreed
+with his testimony. Jack told the story of the collision and how his
+ankle was injured.
+
+"Is there anything else?" asked Dr. Mead.
+
+"I think not," was our hero's answer, "unless Bagot has something to
+say."
+
+"So you did it, eh?" asked Professor Grimm, turning to the new
+student. "I demand that he be punished, Dr. Mead," and Mr. Grimm did
+not even take the trouble to beg Jack's pardon for having falsely
+accused him.
+
+"What have you to say, Bagot?" asked the head of the academy.
+"Circumstances point strongly to you,"
+
+Bagot mumbled something about it being only a harmless joke, and
+seemed quite confused.
+
+"I will not ask you to tell on your companions," Dr. Mead went on
+sternly. "There must have been several of them. If they choose to
+come forward and admit their part, well and good. I will go no
+further with this, since the chief culprit is known. Ranger, you are
+fully vindicated, and I congratulate you on the effective manner in
+which you have proved your innocence."
+
+"As for you, Bagot, seeing that it is your first offense, I will be
+lenient. I will suspend you for one week, and you are to make up all
+the studies you lose in that time. That is all."
+
+With a scowl on his face, and an angry look at Jack, Adrian shuffled
+from the laboratory. The teachers followed Dr. Mead out, while Jack's
+friends gathered around to congratulate him.
+
+"Didn't know you were such a chemist," spoke Sam.
+
+"I'll have to play a march of victory on the jew's-harp and mouth
+organ at the same time!" burst out Fred Kaler.
+
+"Well," admitted Jack, "it came out about as well as I expected."
+
+"Betcherwhat!" exclaimed Budge, as he walked off, stretching his gum
+out at arm's length.
+
+The news soon spread that Jack had been vindicated, and there was an
+impromptu celebration in his room.
+
+"Lopsided lollypops!" exclaimed Nat Anderson. "We ought to do
+something to get even with Bagot, Jack."
+
+"Oh, I'm satisfied, let it go as it is." "But we're not," Sam
+Chalmers put in. "You got vindicated all right, but an insult to you
+is one to all this crowd you travel with. I'll bet Dr. Mead has a
+sort of idea that some of us had a hand in the joke. We may not be
+able to prove we didn't, but we can get even with that sneak Bagot
+for making all the trouble."
+
+"L-l-l-lets puncture h-h-h-is t-t-t-t-ti--" sputtered Will Slade.
+
+"What's that about his necktie?" asked Sam with a grin.
+
+"W-w-w-who s-s-s-said n-n-neck t-t-ti-?"
+
+"I thought you were trying to, and I wanted to help you out," replied
+Sam.
+
+"I-I-I-I ni-m-m-meant his autototototo--"
+
+"Toot-toot!" sung out Fred. "All aboard! Where does your train stop,
+Will?"
+
+"I know what you mean," put in Jack, coming to Will's relief. "But I
+don't want to do anything like bursting his auto tires. That's not my
+way."
+
+"We can easily enough find a plan," Sam went on. "Will you join us,
+Jack?"
+
+"You know I'm always ready for anything that's going."
+
+"Then I'll try and think up something," Sam concluded. "But we'd
+better hustle now. Chapel bell will ring in five minutes."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+TURNING THE TABLES
+
+
+For several days after this there were review examinations so that
+all the students at the academy were kept busy, and there was little
+time for anything but study. At the end of the week Adrian Bagot
+returned from his period of suspension. He did not seem to have
+suffered much, and the boys heard him boasting of having ridden
+nearly a thousand miles in his auto.
+
+One evening Sam and some of his chums paid a visit to Jack Ranger.
+
+"Got anything on to-night?" asked Sam.
+
+"Nothing special, why?"
+
+"Well, I'll not tell you the particulars, and then, if anything
+happens you can truthfully say you never knew a thing about it. But
+if you want to see something, put on an old pair of slippers, so you
+can walk through the corridors softly, and follow us."
+
+"Some fun?" asked Jack.
+
+"Well, we wouldn't go to all this trouble if it was work or study,"
+replied Sam with a grin. "But say nothing, only saw wood and come
+on."
+
+Jack, nothing loath, did as he was told. He got an old pair of felt
+slippers, and noticed that the others were also wearing similar foot-gear.
+
+"First to Professor Socrat's room," whispered Sam when the boys,
+including Will Slade, Fred Kaler and Bony Balmore were out in the
+corridor.
+
+"He's not going to fight a duel with Professor Garlach, is he?" asked
+Jack, recalling an occasion when the two teachers nearly did.
+
+"Not this time," replied Sam, "but there may be a fight in it."
+
+With Sam in the lead the boys went to the room of the French
+professor.
+
+"Now stay back in the shadows," advised the leader. "You can see and
+listen, but keep quiet."
+
+Sam knocked on the door, and, in his most polite tones said:
+
+"I was asked, my dear professor, to leave this with you with the
+compliments of the sender."
+
+"Ah, I zank you extremely, sir," said Professor Socrat, bowing low,
+"I zank ze giver, an' I zank you for ze most polite attention you
+have bestowed on me."
+
+"You are very welcome, I'm sure," murmured Sam, as he hurried away to
+join his waiting comrades.
+
+"I don't see anything funny about that," said Jack.
+
+"Wait until he opens it," whispered Sam.
+
+A few seconds later the hidden boys heard the door of the French
+teacher's room open, and saw him come out.
+
+"It is some meestake," they heard him murmur. "Zis ees for Professor
+Grimm. I will take it to heem," and he walked along the corridor
+toward the elderly instructor's apartment.
+
+"Act one," whispered Sam. "Now for the second."
+
+Silently in their slippers the boys followed the French professor to
+Mr. Grimm's room.
+
+"What is it?" asked the latter when the Frenchman had knocked.
+
+"I come wiz a package, left by mistake wiz me," Mr. Socrat remarked,
+in his usual polite way. "It is addressed to you inside, but ze
+outside wrapper was wiz my name inscribed. I ask your pardon."
+
+"Thanks," said Mr. Grimm shortly, as, with a polite bow, Mr. Socrat
+went back to his room.
+
+Professor Grimm left his door open a little way, and the boys could
+see him quite plainly. They saw him take off the wrapper, and
+disclose a small white box. This he opened and, as he took the cover
+off, there dropped out something that gave a musical clang.
+
+"A bell!" exclaimed Jack in a whisper.
+
+"Hush!" cautioned Sam. "Let's hear what he says."
+
+"Ha!" exclaimed Mr. Grimm. "So this is a joke, eh, Mr. Frenchman?
+Well, we'll see about this!"
+
+He grasped the bell, which was a small one, by the handle, and
+started down the corridor, a scowl on his face, as the boys could see
+by a flickering gaslight, as they were hidden around the corner.
+
+"Now back to Mr. Socrat's room for the third act," said Sam. "Come
+on."
+
+Without the formality of a knock, Mr. Grimm entered the French
+teacher's room.
+
+"So this is your idea of a joke, eh?" he cried, shaking the bell
+under Professor Socrat's nose. "I'll report you to Dr. Mead for this.
+You frog-eater you!"
+
+"Sir-r-r-r!" fairly shouted Professor Socrat. "You call me a frog-
+eater-r-r-r-r?"
+
+"Yes, and a donkey also!" exclaimed Mr. Grimm. "You knew how I've
+felt since that bell joke, and you dare to send me a miniature one!"
+
+"I sent nossing!"
+
+"Didn't I see you just bring this?" demanded Mr. Grimm, holding out
+the bell.
+
+"It was addressed to you on ze paper!"
+
+"Yes, and you did it!"
+
+"I did not!"
+
+"I say you did!"
+
+"Zen you mean zat I tells a lie?"
+
+"If you want to take it that way!"
+
+"Zen I say you also are one who knows not ze truth!"
+
+"Don't call me that name or I'll--"
+
+What the excited professor meant to say was not disclosed as, at that
+moment, in shaking his fist at Professor Socrat he let slip the bell,
+which, with a clang struck the French teacher on the chest.
+
+"A blow! I am insult!" Mr. Socrat exclaimed. "It must be wiped out
+wiz ze blood of my insulter!"
+
+He caught up a book to throw at Mr. Grimm, and let it fly, just as
+Adrian Bagot entered the room. The sporty student caught it full in
+the face.
+
+"Pardon, my dear young friend!" exclaimed the French teacher, seeing
+his missile had gone wide of one mark, though finding another.
+
+"What does this mean?" demanded Adrian, as he saw the two
+belligerents.
+
+"Leave the room, sir!" ordered Professor Grimm. "This is none of your
+affair!"
+
+"I was asked to come here," said Adrian.
+
+"Ha, so this is another part of your plan to play a joke on me,"
+cried Mr. Grimm, glaring at the Frenchman. "You ask this student, who
+was responsible for the original trouble to come here to see a
+repetition."
+
+"Your talk, it ees of ze incomprehensible!" exclaimed Mr. Socrat. "I
+have sent for no one."
+
+"I got a note, signed with your name, asking me to call at your room
+at eight o'clock," said Bagot.
+
+"Hold me, some one, before I die laughing," whispered Sam to his
+chums. In fact they were all laughing so that only the excitement on
+the part of the three in Mr. Socrat's room prevented the boys from
+being discovered.
+
+"Let me see ze writing," said the French teacher.
+
+Adrian showed it to him.
+
+"I nevair wrote that, nevair, nevair, nevair!" exclaimed the
+representative of France.
+
+"But you brought me the bell," put in Mr. Grimm.
+
+"I did, because your name, it was on ze covair of ze box. I not write
+heem."
+
+"Then if you didn't, who did?" asked Mr. Grimm.
+
+"I am no readair of ze mind," replied the Frenchman.
+
+"I'll bet it is one of Jack Ranger's tricks," said Adrian. "It is
+just like him."
+
+"Are you sure you had no hand in it?" asked Mr. Grimm suspiciously,
+turning to Bagot.
+
+"You don't think I'd risk another suspension with graduation so near,
+do you?" asked Bagot.
+
+"I guess you're innocent this time," admitted Mr. Grimm unwillingly.
+"If I discover who did this I'll settle with him."
+
+"You've got to catch 'em first," murmured Sam.
+
+"Well I guess I'll go," went on Mr. Grimm.
+
+"I have been insult, I demand satisfaction," said Mr. Socrat, drawing
+himself to his full height and glaring at the other teacher. "Will
+you name a friend, sir, to whom I can send my representative?"
+
+"You--you don't mean to fight a duel, do you?" asked Professor Grimm,
+nervously.
+
+"Of a certainly yes! I have been struck! I have been insult! I must
+have ze satisfaction!"
+
+"If it comes to that so have I," said Adrian, rubbing his face where
+the book had hit him.
+
+"I have apologized to you. I beg your ten thousand pardons, my young
+friend," said Mr. Socrat, bowing low. "I know when I am at fault. It
+was all an accident. Still, if you demand satisfaction I am bound to
+give it you. I will send ze--"
+
+"Oh, I accept your apology," said Adrian, hastily.
+
+"But I have been called ze eater of ze frogs, an' I have been struck
+by--by a--person!" exploded the Frenchman. u I must see ze blood
+flow, or--"
+
+"Oh, I'll apologize, if it comes to that," said Mr. Grimm, rather
+awkwardly. "I didn't mean to hit you with the bell. As for calling
+you names, why--why I was all excited. I beg your pardon."
+
+"Zen you have made ze amend honorable, an' I accept it," said the
+Frenchman, bowing almost to the floor. "We will regard ze incident as
+closed."
+
+"I'll not, by a long shot," murmured Bagot. "I want satisfaction from
+whoever got me into this and I'll find out sooner or later."
+
+"Mostly later," murmured Sam.
+
+"Where did you get the package?" asked the sporty student of Mr.
+Socrat.
+
+"It was brought to me a little while ago, by one of ze students. It
+was dark in ze hallway and I could not see ze face of heem."
+
+"Luck for me," murmured Sam.
+
+"I see my name on ze wrappair," went on Professor Socrat. "Zen I open
+it an' I see ze name of Mr. Grimm. I go to heem. Ha! Zings begin to
+what you call happen--after zat!"
+
+"Vamoose!" whispered Sam. "I guess we've seen all the fun. They'll
+disperse now. Everyone to his room and undress. Be studying in bed.
+If there's an investigation we can't be accused."
+
+A little later the boys heard Professor Grimm tramping to his room,
+muttering dire vengeance on his tormentors. They heard him open his
+window and throw something out. It fell with a tinkle to the ground.
+
+"The bell," whispered Sam, as he hurried to his room.
+
+"How did you manage it?" asked Jack an hour or so later when Sam had
+entered his chum's apartment, matters having quieted down.
+
+"It was too easy," explained Sam. "I did up the bell, and left it
+with Socrat. I purposely addressed it double. I figured out what
+would happen. Then I sent a fake note to Bagot, telling him Socrat
+wanted him. It came out better than I expected."
+
+"I hope there's no trouble over it," Jack said.
+
+There was none, for neither of the professors cared to have the facts
+made public, and Bagot did not want to let it be known that he had
+been fooled.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+A PLAN THAT FAILED
+
+
+One afternoon Dr. Mead announced that there would be an evening
+lecture, in preparation for final examinations, and he stated that he
+expected every student to be present.
+
+"The only excuse that will be accepted for non-attendance," he said,
+"will be illness. As there are no students sick now, I shall regard
+with grave suspicion any reports of indisposition between now and the
+time for the lecture."
+
+"What do you say to a swim?" asked Sam, of Jack, as they filed out
+from the auditorium where Dr. Mead had made his announcement.
+
+"I'll go," replied Jack. "Any of the other fellows going along?"
+
+"Dick, Nat and Bill Slade are coming," said Sam. "I left them going
+for their suits. Come on."
+
+"Wait until I get mine," spoke Jack, and he hurried off, to join Sam
+a few minutes later.
+
+On the way to a quiet spot in Rudmore Lake, where the boys were in
+the habit of taking their swimming exercises, Jack and Sam were
+joined by the others.
+
+"Did you hear the latest?" asked Bony Balmore, making his anatomy
+rattle in a way peculiar to himself.
+
+"No, what is it?" asked Jack.
+
+"Two new students arrived," went on Bony. "They're chums of Sport
+Bagot's I guess, 'cause I saw them walking with him."
+
+"Who are they?" asked Sam.
+
+"Ed Simpson and John Higley," replied Sam. "I heard they were regular
+cut-ups, and got fired out of one school. Their guardians sent them
+here to finish the term. I s'pose they'll try some funny work."
+
+"L-l-l-l-et 'em t-t-t-try it!" spluttered Will. "I-i g-g-g-guess we
+c-c-c--"
+
+"Oh, whistle it!" exclaimed Sam.
+
+"Pzznt!" exploded Will, which seemed to get his vocal cords in shape
+again. "We'll fix 'em if they try any tricks!"
+
+"Now you're talking," said Jack.
+
+The boys lost little time in getting into the lake. They were
+splashing about in the water, when Jack, who happened to swim near
+shore, was startled by a cautious hail. He looked up, to see Budge
+Rankin half hidden in the grass, making signals to him.
+
+"What is it?" asked Jack.
+
+"Geasynow!" exclaimed Budge, in a hoarse whisper, tossing aside a wad
+of gum that he might talk more plainly.
+
+"Go easy about what?" asked Jack.
+
+"They're going to play a trick on you," said Budge.
+
+"Who?" inquired Jack, while the other boys, attracted by the
+conversation drew near.
+
+"Adrian Bagot and the two new students," went on Budge. "They're on
+their way here. Goin' t' steal your clothes an' make you late for th'
+lecture. I heard 'em talkin' about it. Thought I'd warn you.
+'Sthmatterithfoolinem?" Budge had taken a fresh chew of gum, which
+accounted for the way in which he inquired what was the matter with
+fooling the enemy.
+
+"True for you!" exclaimed Sam. "How we going to do it?"
+
+Jack pondered a moment, idly splashing the water with his opened
+hand. Then he exclaimed:
+
+"I have it! How long before they'll be here, Budge?"
+
+"'Bout ten minutes I reckon."
+
+"Long enough. Come on boys."
+
+"What you up to?" asked Nat.
+
+"Say nothing but follow me," was all Jack replied.
+
+He scrambled up the bank to where he had left his clothes. Catching
+up the garments into a bundle he placed them further along the bank,
+on a little bluff that overlooked the edge of the lake. The clothes
+were in plain sight.
+
+"They'll see them there," objected Fred.
+
+"That's what I want," Jack replied. "Do as I do."
+
+Wondering what was up the others obeyed. Jack then ran to a small
+boathouse, close to the swimming place, and returned with three long,
+thin ropes, used to tie the craft to the dock.
+
+For a few minutes Jack's fingers flew nimbly. Then he placed three
+rope circles, hiding them well in the grass, each one just in front
+of each of the three piles of clothes. He carefully carried the long
+ends of the ropes down the bank and into the water.
+
+"Oh, I see!" exclaimed Sam, with a chuckle. "Say, this is great!"
+
+"Now, Budge," said Jack, when he had finished his preparations. "You
+hide in the bushes. When you think it's time, you toss a stone into
+the water. Do you understand?"
+
+"Betcherlife!" replied Budge, shortly.
+
+"Get down under the bank, then, fellows," said Jack to his
+companions. "Keep well in shore, and when you hear the stone splash,
+pull. That's all!"
+
+"But they may take our clothes," objected Will, who did not seem to
+understand.
+
+"I don't believe they will," replied Jack, grimly.
+
+The boys entered the water again, and, crouched close under the bank,
+sinking down so that only the tip of their noses were above the
+surface. It was almost impossible to tell they were there.
+
+Had any one been up on the bank a few minutes later he would have
+observed three lads come creeping along, as if they were afraid of
+being seen. Adrian Bagot was in the lead.
+
+"I don't see them" spoke one of the trio.
+
+"Keep quiet, Ed Simpson," cautioned Adrian. "That Ranger chap has
+sharp ears. Do you see 'em, John?"
+
+"There's their clothes in little piles, just ahead," replied John
+Higley. "They couldn't have left 'em better for us. Come on; we'll
+hide 'em, and then we'll see what happens."
+
+"Guess they won't be so fresh after this," spoke Bagot.
+
+Slowly the trio crept forward. Well might Jack and his chums worried
+for the fate of their garments had they seen the three conspirators.
+But Budge was on the watch.
+
+Just as the three sneaks were about to reach down and gather the
+swimmers' clothes, a stone sailed through the air, and fell with a
+splash into the water. An instant later there was a wild scene on the
+bank.
+
+Three youths went flying toward the edge of the lake as though
+propelled by unseen hands. They seemed to have ropes attached to
+their legs, ropes which were being pulled from below.
+
+Then three well-dressed lads were struggling in the water, while five
+other youths stood up in the shallows looking on.
+
+"I guess we turned the tables that time," remarked Jack.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+FOILING A PLOT
+
+
+"Save me! Save me!" yelled Adrian Bagot.
+
+"I'm drowning!" screamed Ed Simpson.
+
+"I'm sinking!" shouted John Higley.
+
+The three conspirators were floundering about in the water. Because
+of the rope nooses about their feet their efforts to stand upright
+were not entirely successful.
+
+"Who did this?" inquired Bagot angrily, as he tried to get rid of a
+mouthful of water.
+
+"If--if I-I die they'll hang for this!" spluttered Ed Simpson.
+
+"No danger of your drowning, you're too mean," said Jack. "Besides
+it's only up to your knees. Stand up and wade out."
+
+By this time the three lads, their clothing dripping with water, had
+managed to stand upright. They reached down under the dancing
+wavelets and loosened the nooses.
+
+"You'll pay for this, Jack Ranger," shouted Adrian, shaking his fist
+at our hero.
+
+"All right, I'm ready whenever you are," was the cool answer. "Come
+on, fellows, we don't want to be late for the lecture," and he
+started from the water, followed by his chums.
+
+"I'll have you arrested for damaging my clothes," exclaimed Ed.
+
+"And I suppose you'd tell on the witness stand about what you
+intended to do to ours," went on Jack. "I guess you'll cry 'quits,'
+that's what you'll do. You tried to play a trick on us, but you got
+left. So long. Don't miss the lecture."
+
+He scrambled ashore, his comrades doing likewise, while the three
+lads who had taken such an unexpected bath waded out as best they
+could. They were sorry looking sights.
+
+"But I don't exactly un-d-d-d-erstand how it it h-h-h-appened?"
+stuttered Will, who had not had hold of one of the ropes.
+
+"I just made slip nooses, and placed them where they'd have to step
+into them before they could lay hands on the clothes," explained
+Jack. "Budge gave me the signal when they were inside the ropes."
+
+"And then we just pulled," put in Nat. "Wow! It was a corker, Jack!
+How did you think of it?"
+
+"It just happened to come to me. Say didn't they come down off that
+bank sailing, though?"
+
+"I pulled as if I was landing a ten pound pickerel," said Fred. "I
+wonder who I had."
+
+"Didn't stop to notice," Jack said, as he slipped on his coat. "They
+all came together. What a splash they made!"
+
+By this time the three conspirators had crawled up the bank. They
+were so soaking wet that it was hard to walk. Their shoes "squashed"
+out water at every step. They sat down on the grass, took them off,
+and removed some of their garments, which they proceeded to wring
+out.
+
+"Better hurry up," advised Jack, as he finished dressing. "Lecture
+begins in about two hours, and you're quite a way from home."
+
+"I'll--" began Ed Simpson, when Adrian stopped him with a gesture.
+
+"Sorry we have to leave you," Sam went on. "If you'd sent your cards
+we would have had the water warmed for you. Hope you didn't find it
+too chilly."
+
+The three cronies did not reply, but went on trying to get as much
+water as possible from their garments. Leaving them sitting on the
+grass, as the afternoon waned into evening, the swimmers hurried back
+to the academy.
+
+When the roll was called at the evening lecture, which was at an
+early hour, Jack and his friends replied "here!"
+
+For a week or more after the episode at the lake, matters at the
+academy went on in a rather more even tenor than was usual. One night
+Sam, who finished his studying early went to Jack's room.
+
+"Boning away?" he asked.
+
+"Just finishing my Caesar," was the reply. "Why, anything on?"
+
+"Nothing special," replied Sam. "Do you feel anything queer in your
+bones?"
+
+"Not so much as a touch of fever and ague," replied Jack with a
+laugh. "Do you need quinine?"
+
+"Quit your fooling. I mean don't you feel as if you wanted to do
+something?"
+
+"Oh I'm always that way, more or less," Jack admitted. "I'm not
+taking anything for it, though."
+
+"I'd like to take a stroll," said Sam. "I think that would quiet me
+down. I feel just as if something was going to happen."
+
+"Probably something will, if we go out at this hour," Jack said.
+"It's against the rules."
+
+"I know it is, but it wouldn't be the first time you or I did it.
+Come on, let's go out. Down the trellis, the way you did when you
+discovered Grimm smoking."
+
+"I don't know," began Jack.
+
+"Of course you don't," interrupted Sam. "I'll attend to all that.
+Come on."
+
+Needing no more urging, Jack laid aside his book, turned his light
+low, and soon he and Sam were cautiously making their way from Jack's
+window, along a trellis and drain pipe to the ground.
+
+"There!" exclaimed Sam, as he dropped lightly to the earth. "I feel
+better already. Some of the restlessness has gone."
+
+"Keep shady," muttered Jack. "Some of the teachers have rooms near
+here."
+
+They walked along under the shadow of the Hall until they came to a
+window from which a brilliant light streamed forth. It came from a
+crack between the lowered shade and the casement. It was impossible
+to pass it without seeing what was going on inside the apartment. At
+the same time they could hear the murmur of voices.
+
+"Adrian Bagot, and his two cronies up to some trick!" whispered Jack,
+as he grasped Sam by the arm.
+
+The two friends saw the three new students bending over a table,
+containing a pot of something, which they seemed to be stirring with
+a long stick.
+
+"What are they up to?" whispered Sam.
+
+"Experimenting with chemicals, perhaps," said Jack.
+
+"Don't you believe it," retorted Sam. "They're up to some game, you
+can bet. I wonder if we can't get wise to what it is."
+
+Cautiously they drew nearer to the window. They found it was open a
+crack.
+
+"Will it make much of an explosion?" asked Ed Simpson.
+
+
+"Hardly any," replied Higley. "Only a puff and lots of smoke, but it
+will leave its mark all right, and I guess those fresh friends of
+Jack Ranger's will laugh on the other corner of their mouths."
+
+"I'd like to get even with them before the term closes," put in
+Adrian.
+
+"We'll do it all right," went on Ed.
+
+"Don't be too sure of that," whispered Jack.
+
+It did not require much effort on the part of Jack and Sam to
+understand what the three conspirators were up to. Their
+conversation, which floated through the opened window, and their
+references to certain localities put the two listeners in possession
+of the whole scheme.
+
+"Well, if that isn't the limit," said Jack in a whisper. "I wouldn't
+believe they'd dare to do it."
+
+"How can we foil their plans?" asked Sam.
+
+"Hark, some one is coming," said Jack, dropping down on his hands and
+knees, an example which Sam followed. Then came a cautious signal, a
+whistle.
+
+"It's John Smith, my Indian friend!" exclaimed Jack. "He must have
+just got back," for the half-breed had been away for a few weeks, as
+one of his relatives was ill. Jack sounded a cautious whistle in
+reply, and soon the Indian student was at his side. There were
+hurried greetings, and Jack soon explained the situation.
+
+"Let me think it over a minute," said John Smith. "It takes me rather
+suddenly."
+
+For a few seconds John remained in deep thought. Then he exclaimed:
+
+"I think I have it. Have you any chemicals in your room, Jack?"
+
+"Plenty," was the answer. "I've been boning on that lately, and I got
+a fresh supply from the laboratory the other day to experiment with."
+
+"Then I think we'll make these chaps open their eyes."
+
+The three friends hurried to Jack's room, where they were busy for
+some time, behind carefully drawn shades. At the end of about two
+hours, Jack, who had been keeping watch from a window, exclaimed:
+
+"There they go with the stuff. It's time we got a move on."
+
+"They'll not set it off until midnight," spoke Sam, "That's what they
+said. We'll have time enough to do what we are going to."
+
+The three friends worked hurriedly. When they had finished they had
+several packages. Down the trellis they went and out on the campus,
+which was shrouded in darkness.
+
+They made their way to the foot of a statue of George Washington,
+which stood on a broad base in front of the school. There stood the
+Father of His Country, with outstretched arms, as if warning invaders
+away from the precincts of learning.
+
+"They've been here!" said Sam in a whisper.
+
+He pointed to some straggling black lines at the base of the figure,
+and to a thin thing like a string: which led over the grass toward
+the room of Adrian Bagot.
+
+"They've put our initials in powder here," said Jack. "Trying to
+throw the blame on us when it goes off."
+
+"We'll soon fix that," replied Sam. The three boys made some rapid
+movements around the statue, and then cut the thin thing which led to
+the room of young Bagot.
+
+"I guess when he touches off that fuse he'll wonder what has
+happened," observed John Smith.
+
+"Have you enough of the other fuse?" asked Jack.
+
+"Plenty," replied the Indian student. "Have you changed the
+initials?"
+
+"Every one," said Sam.
+
+"Then I think we can go back," said John. "Take care of my fuse.
+Don't get tangled up in it."
+
+The boys made their way quietly to a spot just under the window of
+Bagot's room. There they placed what seemed to be a piece of board.
+
+"Now back to your room, and wait until they start the fun," said
+John.
+
+The three friends had not long to wait. A little after midnight they
+heard Bagot's window cautiously open. There was the sound of a match
+striking, and then Sam called to Jack:
+
+"Let her go!"
+
+A second later a thin trail of fire spurted along
+ the ground from the sporty student's room. It was followed by a
+larger one from the foot of the trellis by which Jack had descended.
+A few seconds later it seemed as if a Fourth of July celebration was
+in progress.
+
+Sparks of fire ran along to the statue of the first President. Then
+there was a puff of smoke, and in front of the hero of the Revolution
+there shot up dancing flames.
+
+At the same time there sounded several sharp explosions, as though
+the British were firing on the Minute Men at Lexington, and the
+latter were replying as fast as they could load and discharge their
+flintlocks.
+
+Windows began to go up here and there, and heads were thrust forth.
+
+"What is it?" "What's the matter?" "Are there burglars?" were some of
+the cries.
+
+Brighter now burned the fire at the foot of the statue, which was
+enveloped in a cloud of flame and smoke, and, had the original been
+alive he must have delighted in the baptism of gunpowder.
+
+Then there came a louder explosion. It was followed by a shower of
+sparks, and a trail of sparks began running along the ground, toward
+the college.
+
+An instant later there blazed forth on a board as on an illuminated
+sign, in front of the room of Adrian Bagot the words in letters of
+fire:
+
+WE DID IT.
+
+Underneath, in smaller characters were the initials;
+
+"A.B. E.S. J.H."
+
+"Wait until Dr. Mead sees that," said Jack, as he looked out on the
+campus, which was now a scene of brilliancy.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+THE BURGLAR SCARE
+
+
+The whole academy was now aroused. Several students and teachers, in
+scanty attire, had come from their rooms and were hurrying down to
+see if the place was on fire. For several minutes the blazing words
+and initials shone out amid the darkness. Then they died away in a
+shower of sparks, and windows could be heard being put down.
+
+"That's excitement enough for one night," remarked John Smith. "It
+succeeded better than I thought it would."
+
+"That was a great idea," said Jack.
+
+"Glad you think so," the Indian went on.
+
+"I've seen soldiers at the Canadian forts play all sorts of tricks
+with gunpowder and slow fuse so I just adopted some of them. It was
+easy enough, after they laid the powder train, with the initials of
+you, Sam, and Bony, to change them into a general serpentine twist
+with their initials in the midst of it. By ramming some of the powder
+down into the holes in the foundation it exploded with quite a
+noise."
+
+"Lucky you had those chemicals in your room, Jack, or I'd never been
+able to make that board with the words 'We did it' on and stick it up
+in front of Adrian's window. I used part of their own long fuse, and
+it was a good one."
+
+"Seemed to do the work all right," agreed Sam.
+
+"It sure did," observed Jack. "I wonder what they thought when they
+saw the fire coming their way?"
+
+"Hush! Here comes some one!" exclaimed Sam. and the boys put out
+their light, which was burning low.
+
+"It's Dr. Mead; I know his step," said Jack.
+
+"I'll bet he's on his way to Bagot's room," spoke Sam. "Cracky! I'm
+glad it isn't me."
+
+"It's only good luck it isn't!" put in Jack. "If we hadn't gone out
+they might have exploded their powder, and, in the morning our
+initials would have been found at the bottom of the statue, burned in
+the stone."
+
+A little later loud talking was heard from the direction of Adrian's
+room. It quieted down, after a while. But there was a strenuous
+session at chapel the next morning, and Adrian and his cronies were
+given extra lessons to do.
+
+For a week or more after this all the students had to buckle down to
+hard study, as the annual examinations were approaching. Jack and his
+chums had little time for sports of any kind, as they had a number of
+lessons to master in addition to their regular work. But by diligence
+they kept up with the requirements, and, about two weeks before the
+time set for the closing of the school, they found themselves on even
+terms.
+
+"I'm ready for some fun," announced Jack, one evening. "I've been
+good and quiet so long I can feel my wings sprouting."
+
+"Better go easy," cautioned John Smith.
+
+"I'm going to; as easy as I can," replied Jack. "But I've got to do
+something or break loose."
+
+"Shivering side-saddles!" exclaimed Nat Anderson. "Let's have a
+burglar scare."
+
+"How?" asked Sam.
+
+"I'll think of a plan," Nat went on. "Howling huckleberries, but I
+too am pining for a little excitement, Jack."
+
+"Well, trot out your plan," Jack said. "We haven't got much time."
+
+"Let me think a minute," begged Nat, and, while he assumed an
+attitude as though he was trying to solve a problem in geometry, Fred
+drew out a little tin fife and played such a doleful air that Nat
+cried:
+
+"How do you expect me to think with that thing going?" and, with a
+quick grab he snatched it from Fred's hand and sent it spinning
+across Jack's room.
+
+"I have it!" Nat exclaimed, when the excitement had somewhat
+subsided. "You all know what timid creatures Professors Gale and Hall
+are. They room together, and I believe they'd scream if they saw a
+mouse. Not that they're a bad sort, for they have both helped me a
+lot in my lessons. But men ought not to be such babies. Now what's
+the matter with a couple of us disguising ourselves as burglars and
+going into their rooms about midnight? The rest of us can hide and
+hear the fun."
+
+"Maybe they'll shoot," suggested Sam.
+
+"Shoot! They'd be afraid to handle a revolver," was Nat's comment.
+
+"Well, as long as it won't do any real harm, and as we positively
+have to have something happen, let's go on with it," said Jack.
+"Who'll be the burglars?"
+
+"Nat'll have to be one," spoke John Smith, as he proposed it."
+
+"Ll-l-let me be t-t-the o-o-o-other," said Will Slade haltingly.
+
+"What? And when you demand their money or their lives how would you
+say it?" asked Sam.
+
+"Nice sort of a burglar you'd make. 'G-g-g-give m-m-m-me y-y-y-your
+m-m-mon--'"
+
+Sam stopped suddenly and dodged back, as Will aimed a blow at him. In
+doing so he stumbled over a pile of books and went down in a heap.
+
+"Serves you right," said Jack. "Just for his making fun of Will I
+vote we elect Will as one of the burglars."
+
+The others agreed, even Sam, and Will regained his good nature.
+
+"How about masks?" asked Sam.
+
+"I'll make some," replied Jack, and, from some pieces of black cloth,
+he quickly cut two false-faces.
+
+"I-I-I-I've g-g-got t-t-t have a g-g-g-g--" came from Will.
+
+"Are you trying to say a pair of gum shoes?" asked John Smith. "I'll
+lend you a pair of moccasins."
+
+"I guess he means gun," volunteered Nat. "But these will do just as
+well," and he got a couple of nickel-plated bicycle pumps from a
+drawer. "They'll shine in the dim light just like revolvers," he went
+on.
+
+"Guess I'll take a stroll down the corridor and see how the land
+lies," said Jack. "We don't want to burglarize a room that has no one
+in it, and they may not be in when the second story men get there."
+
+"That's so, how are we going to get in?" asked Nat.
+
+"Easy," replied Jack. "Their room is on the ground floor, and you can
+just raise the screen up and drop in. They always leave their window
+open a bit, as they're fresh air fiends."
+
+While Jack went to take an observation, the two amateur burglars made
+their arrangements. They turned their clothing inside out, and, with
+the two pieces of black cloth across their faces, while ragged caps
+were drawn down close over their foreheads, they looked the part to
+perfection.
+
+Jack soon returned, to report that the coast was clear, and that both
+assistants were in the room.
+
+"Gales is reading Shakespeare, and Hall is manicuring his nails," the
+spy reported. "But it's too early yet. Let's go take a stroll and
+about midnight will be the right time. We can hide in the bushes
+opposite the room and hear 'em call for help. Then we can rush up and
+pretend we came to the rescue. That will be a good excuse in case
+we're caught watching the game."
+
+Both assistants retired early, and the boys knew that twelve o'clock
+would find them both sound asleep. After a stroll about the college
+grounds, taking care not to venture into the light but keeping well
+in the shadows, Jack announced it was the hour for the show to
+commence.
+
+"Better let Nat do the talking," Jack advised Will. "Have you got
+anything to disguise your voice, Nat?"
+
+"I can talk down in my throat."
+
+"Better put a peanut in your mouth," Jack went on passing over
+several. "That will make you sound more like a desperate villain."
+
+Accordingly, Nat stuffed one of the unshelled nuts into his cheek,
+and then, seeing that Will was ready, he led the way from the shadow
+of the bushes toward the window of the room where the assistants
+slept. It was a dark night, which was favorable to their plans.
+
+As Jack had said, the only bar to entrance was a light screen in the
+casement. Nat raised this, and, listening a few seconds, to make sure
+the teachers were asleep, he crawled into the room.
+
+Will followed him. For a moment after they had entered the boys did
+not know what to do. They were unaware of the method of procedure
+common among burglars. They were in doubt whether to announce their
+presence, or wait until the sleepers discovered it.
+
+Chance, however, took charge of matters for them. In moving about
+Will hit a book that projected over the edge of a table. It fell
+down, bounced against a cane standing in one corner, and the stick
+toppled against a wash pitcher, making a noise as if a gong had been
+rung.
+
+"Now be ready to throw a scare into 'em!" whispered Nat to Will.
+"That's bound to rouse 'em."
+
+It did. They could hear the sleepers sitting up in bed. Then Mr. Hall
+demanded:
+
+"Who's there?"
+
+"Don't move as you value your life!" exclaimed Nat, in his deepest
+tones.
+
+"We-we-we!" began Will forgetting the instructions to let Nat do the
+talking. His companion, however, silenced him by a vigorous punch in
+the stomach.
+
+"We're after money!" Nat went on.
+
+There was a sudden click and the room became illuminated. Mr. Hall
+had pulled the chain that turned on the automatic gaslight. The two
+teachers were sitting up in their beds, staring at the intruders.
+
+Nat drew his bicycle pump, and Will followed his example.
+
+"Money or your life!" exclaimed Nat, in dramatic accents.
+
+"Why--why--I believe they're burglars!" cried Mr. Gales.
+
+"The impudence of them!" almost shouted Mr. Hall. The next instant he
+sprang out of bed and advanced on Nat and Will with long strides.
+This was more than the boys had bargained for.
+
+Seizing Nat, Mr. Hall, who proved much more muscular than his build
+indicated, fairly tossed the boy out of the window. Fortunately he
+fell on the soft grass and was only shaken up.
+
+"Get out of here, you scoundrel!" exclaimed the athletic teacher,
+making a rush for Will.
+
+"D-d-don't h-h-h-hurt me!" pleaded the bold burglar. "I-I-I-I we--"
+
+As Mr. Hall grabbed him the black mask came off and the instructor,
+seeing the lad's face cried out:
+
+"It's Will Slade!"
+
+He was about to send the burglar flying after his companion, but this
+discovery stopped him. At the same instant, the hidden crowd,
+thinking it was about time to do the rescue act, had started forward.
+
+"Keep back!" cried Nat. "It's a fizzle!" and he limped from under the
+window as fast as he could.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+NAT'S INVITATION
+
+
+The boys needed no other warning to make themselves scarce. They had
+reckoned without their host in planning the trick on the two
+teachers.
+
+"Where's Will?" asked Jack of Nat.
+
+"I guess they've caught him," the limping "burglar" said.
+
+"That means trouble," put in Sam. "How did it happen?"
+
+The conspirators were now some distance away from the Hall, and out
+of hearing distance.
+
+"It happened because they weren't the milksops we thought them," said
+Nat; rubbing his elbow. "The way he grabbed me felt as if I was being
+hugged by a bear."
+
+"Then they didn't get frightened?"
+
+"Not a bit. Came right at me."
+
+The boys looked back. The brilliantly lighted window of the teacher's
+room shone out plainly amid the blackness of the night. As the boys
+watched, they saw a figure climb over the sill.
+
+"There comes Will," spoke Sam.
+
+"I wonder if they're not going to report us," said Jack. "Say, It
+will be the first time a teacher didn't take an opportunity of
+getting even."
+
+As soon as Will found himself on the ground he set off on a run,
+toward where he supposed his friends to be in hiding.
+
+Jack gave the usual signal-whistle of his crowd, and Will, hearing
+it, came up quickly.
+
+"What happened?"
+
+"Didn't he make a row?"
+
+"Are they going to report it?"
+
+"How'd you get away?"
+
+These were some of the questions to which the throng of boys demanded
+answers.
+
+"I-I-I--c-can't t-t-tell h-h-h--."
+
+"Here! you quit that!" exclaimed Jack sternly, thinking to frighten
+Will out of his stuttering.
+
+The rebuke had the desired effect, and, for once Will forgot to mix
+his words and letters.
+
+"When he saw it was me," he explained, "he didn't seem to know what
+to say. Then he laughed and Gales laughed, and I felt pretty foolish;
+I tell you.
+
+"Gales asked me who was with me, but Hall cut in and said he didn't
+want me to tell. I wouldn't anyhow, only it was white of him not to
+insist."
+
+"It sure was," murmured Jack. "Oh, I can see trouble coming our way."
+
+"Well," went on Will. "He looked at me a little longer, and I heard
+Gales mutter something about 'boys will be boys,' then Hall made a
+sign to him, and Gales went back to bed."
+
+"What did you do?" asked Jack.
+
+"Why, Hall motioned to me to climb out of the windows and I did,
+mighty quick, you can bet"
+
+"Wait until chapel to-morrow morning," said Nat. "Maybe we won't get
+it! Never mind, the end of the term is almost here, and they can't do
+any more than suspend us. Though I hate to have the folks hear of
+it."
+
+There were several anxious hearts beating under boyish coats when the
+opening exercises were held the next morning. The burglar schemers
+watched the two assistants file in and take their usual places on the
+raised platform.
+
+"How do they look?" whispered Nat to Jack.
+
+"Don't seem to have an awful lot of fire in their eyes," was the
+answer.
+
+"Wait until Dr. Mead begins," whispered Sam, a sort of Job's
+comforter.
+
+But to the boys' astonishment, there was no reference to the night's
+prank. The exercises went off as usual, though every time Dr. Mead
+cleared his throat, or began to speak on a new subject, there was a
+nervous thrill on the part of the conspirators.
+
+"I have one more announcement to make, and that will end the
+exercises for the day," the head of the Academy said.
+
+"Here it comes," whispered Jack.
+
+"Will Slade and Nat Anderson are requested to meet Professors Hall
+and Gales after chapel," was what the doctor said.
+
+There was a little buzz of excitement among the students, for the
+story of the escapade had become generally known.
+
+"Glad I'm not in their shoes, but I suppose we'll all come in for
+it," said Sam, as he and the others filed out of the assembly room.
+Will and Nat remained, their spirits anything but pleasant.
+
+Their companions stayed out on the campus, waiting for them, instead
+of dispersing to their rooms to prepare for the first lesson period.
+As the minutes dragged away there was a general feeling of
+apprehension.
+
+"Don't s'pose they'll get a flogging do you?" asked Sam.
+
+"Against the rules of the institution," replied Jack.
+
+"Here they come," announced Fred Kaler. "I don't know whether I ought
+to play a funeral march or 'Palms of Victory.'"
+
+"Probably the former," put in John Smith.
+
+"Well?" asked Jack, as the two "burglars" came within hailing
+distance, "what did they do to you?"
+
+"It's all right!" exclaimed Nat. "Say, they're bricks all right,
+Gales and Hall are! They took us to Dr. Mead's little private office,
+and we thought sure we were in for it. I didn't know how they
+recognized me until Gales gave me my handkerchief, which I had
+dropped in the room. It had my name on it."
+
+"Skip those details!" interrupted Sam. "Get down to business. Did
+they fire you?"
+
+"Not a bit of it," replied Nat. "They asked me if I was hurt in the--
+er--the--jump I took from the window. I said I wasn't. They then made
+some remarks about the night air being bad toward the end of the
+term, and they told us to go to our classes. Not a word about it. I
+call that white, I do."
+
+"Right you are!" came in chorus from the others.
+
+"We ought to send 'em a vote of thanks," suggested Sam.
+
+"No, I think I'd let it rest where it is," came from Jack. "They want
+to show that they could have made trouble if they wanted to. We'd
+better let it drop. I wonder if Dr. Mead knows it?"
+
+"I don't believe they told him," was Nat's opinion. "You see there
+wasn't much of a row, and it was all over in a little while. But it
+certainly is one on us."
+
+To this they all agreed. Yet one good thing came of it, for the boys
+had a better understanding of the characters of the two instructors.
+They felt an increased respect for them morally as well as
+physically, and there came a better spirit between Jack's crowd and
+the two professors. The latter never even referred to the burglar
+incident, and, whenever any of the other students spoke in rather
+slighting terms of either of the instructors, Jack and his friends
+were ready defenders.
+
+On account of preparations for examinations there was only a half
+day's session, the boys being given the afternoon off. After dinner
+Jack accepted an invitation from John Smith to go out in the Indian
+student's canoe on the lake.
+
+They paddled about for several hours, and were on their way back to
+the boathouse, when a rowing craft, in which two youths were seated,
+came swiftly toward them.
+
+"Look out!" called Jack. "Do you want to run us down?"
+
+Whether the rowers intended that or not was not evident, but they
+certainly came within a few inches of smashing the frail canoe. Only
+John's skill prevented it. As the rowboat swept past one of the oars
+fairly snatched the paddle from Jack's hand.
+
+"What's the matter with you?" he demanded angrily.
+
+The only answer was a mocking laugh, and, as the boat was now far
+enough past to show the faces of the rowers, Jack looked to see who
+they were.
+
+"Jerry Chowden!" he exclaimed. "I thought
+ he was in Chicago," and he recalled the threatening letter.
+
+"Guess he's here to see the closing exercises," remarked John. "Who's
+that with him?"
+
+"Adrian Bagot" replied Jack. "Well, they're a nice team. I shouldn't
+wonder but there'd be some trouble for some one if they stay long."
+
+"Not many more days left," John observed. "Grab your paddle," and he
+swung the canoe around to where the broad blade floated.
+
+In his room that evening Jack's meditations as to what Chowden's
+return might mean were interrupted by the entrance of Nat Anderson.
+He seemed quite excited and was waving a letter over his head.
+
+"Great news," he exclaimed.
+
+"What is?" asked Jack. "Some one left you a thousand dollars?"
+
+"No, it's an invitation from my uncle, Morris Kent, who has a big
+ranch near Denville, Colorado, to come out and spend the summer
+vacation with him."
+
+"Fine!" cried Jack.
+
+"But that isn't the best part," added Nat. "He says I can bring two
+chums with me, and I want you to be one."
+
+"Do you mean it?" asked Jack.
+
+"Sure."
+
+"Who else will you take?"
+
+There was a noise in the corridor.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+A MEETING WITH CHOWDEN
+
+
+"Studying or talking?" asked a voice in the hall outside of Jack's
+room, and the door was pushed open to admit John Smith. Jack and Nat
+looked at each other. The same thought seemed to come to both of
+them.
+
+"Him!" they exclaimed together.
+
+"What's this, a game, or a joke?"
+
+"A little of both," Jack said. "Tell him about it, Nat."
+
+Nat explained the receipt of his uncle's invitation.
+
+"We were just wondering who would make the third member of the party,
+when you came in," he said, "and we both decided on you."
+
+"It was very kind of you to invite me," John said. "I guess I can
+arrange to go. Where is this ranch?"
+
+"Near Denville, Colorado," replied Nat.
+
+John started and looked at Jack.
+
+"Nothing the matter with that place, is there?" asked Jack.
+
+"No. On the contrary it couldn't be better," replied John. "That's
+where we want to go to settle the mystery--"
+
+He stopped, evidently on account of Nat's presence.
+
+"Oh, Nat knows all about it," said Jack. "I see what you're driving
+at."
+
+"Yes," went on John. "Denville is not many miles from Denver, and at
+the latter place, you remember, we can go to the Capital Bank, and
+get the address of Orion Tevis."
+
+"Yes, and then maybe we can locate my father," Jack exclaimed. "Say,
+Nat, this couldn't have happened better. It's fine of you to think of
+me."
+
+"The same here," put in John.
+
+"Well, I don't know of any fellows I'd rather have than you two,"
+replied Nat.
+
+"Thanks," his two friends answered.
+
+"I'm going to write a reply at once," Nat went on. "I'll go to town
+and mail it to-night. I guess Dr. Mead will let me."
+
+"Let's all three go," suggested Jack. "I'll ask permission. We've not
+been caught in any scrapes lately, and our records are fairly good.
+It's early."
+
+Dr. Mead readily gave permission for the three chums to go to the
+village where the post-office was.
+
+"But you must be in by eleven o'clock," he stipulated. "I shall
+instruct Martin to watch out for you, and if you are not in at that
+hour it will mean demerits all around. I would not let you go, only
+you have had very good records of late." On their way to the village
+the three chums talked of nothing but the proposed trip. To Nat it
+was enough excitement to think of merely going west. But to Jack, who
+wanted to solve the mystery of his father it meant much more. He
+hoped since the eleven years of voluntary exile were almost up, to
+induce his father to come east and make his home.
+
+"That is, if I can find him," thought Jack. "I hope I can. First I'll
+have to locate Orion Tevis, to see what he knows."
+
+"I'll be glad to get out on a range once more," said John Smith.
+"I've got enough Indian blood in me to feel cooped up in a house. It
+will be sport out there, riding ponies and seeing the cattle."
+
+The boys reached the post-office about nine o'clock and Nat mailed
+his letter.
+
+"It's early to go back," said Jack. "Isn't there something that we
+can do?"
+
+"There's a moving picture show in town," said John. "Let's go to it
+for awhile."
+
+This was voted a good idea. The boys enjoyed the scenes thrown on the
+screene, and were particularly taken with a depiction of a cowboy
+roping a steer.
+
+"That's what we'll soon see in reality," whispered Nat.
+
+They started through the village, and, as they turned down a quiet
+street that led toward Washington Hall, Jack saw a dark figure
+sneaking along on the opposite side, in the shadow of some buildings.
+
+"Looks as if some one was following us," said Jack to himself.
+
+As our hero pulled out his handkerchief there flew out with it a
+letter. The sight of it reminded him that he had promised Professor
+Hall to mail it that evening. It had slipped his mind, even though he
+had been in the post-office.
+
+"I'd better run right back with it," said Jack. "Mighty stupid of me.
+Well, there's no help for it, and I don't want to disappoint Hall.
+He's a good friend of ours."
+
+He picked the letter up, and held it in his hand to insure that it
+would not be forgotten again.
+
+"I say!" called Jack to his companions, who were now some distance
+ahead of him. "I've got to run back and mail a letter. Go on and I'll
+catch up to you."
+
+"All right," said John. "We'll walk slow."
+
+Intent on rectifying his forgetfulness, Jack turned back on the run.
+He did not see three figures sneaking into the shadow of a dark
+doorway just as he turned.
+
+"We'll have him just where we want him," whispered one of the youths
+who had been following the students.
+
+"You're not going to be three to one, are you?" asked one of the
+trio.
+
+"No, I guess Jerry Chowden is a match for Jack Ranger any day," was
+the answer. "You two can look on, and see me wallop him."
+
+Jack made good time back to the post-office, and came hurrying along
+the street, whistling a lively tune. In the meantime the three
+plotters had walked ahead, taking care not to get too near Nat and
+John. The latter, however, had walked faster than they intended, so
+that they were a good quarter of a mile ahead of Jack.
+
+As the latter came opposite the last building that stood on the edge
+of where there were a number of vacant lots, he was surprised to hear
+a hail.
+
+"Hold on there!" someone cried.
+
+"Who are you?" asked Jack, looking around. Then, as three figures
+emerged from the shadows and blocked his path, he exclaimed:
+
+"Oh, it's you, is it, Jerry Chowden? Well, what do you want?"
+
+"I want to get square with you," replied the bully, in an angry tone.
+
+"And you bring two of your toadies along to help you, I suppose,"
+said Jack, unable to keep a sneer from his voice.
+
+"Look here!" exclaimed one of Jerry's companions. "I don't know who
+you are, except by name, but I'm not going to have you insult me.
+Jerry is a friend of mine--"
+
+"Sorry for you," interrupted Jack cooly.
+
+"None of your lip!" exclaimed the other strange youth.
+
+"Jerry says he has a bone to pick with you," the one who had first
+addressed Jack went on. "He told us he was going to have it out with
+you, and invited us along. We're not going to take any part, you can
+rest assured of that, and there'll be fair play. But if you're
+afraid, why that's another matter."
+
+"Who said I was afraid?" demanded Jack hotly.
+
+"You seem to act so."
+
+"I don't know that I ever did you any harm, Jerry Chowden," Jack
+said, more quietly, "but if you feel so why I can't help it."
+
+"I do, and I'm going to get even," spoke Jerry, advancing closer to
+Jack.
+
+"Stand aside," demanded Jack, as the bully almost brushed against
+him.
+
+"Not until you've given me satisfaction."
+
+"What do you mean?"
+
+"You know well enough what I mean."
+
+"Do you want to fight?" asked Jack calmly.
+
+"Certainly I do!" exclaimed the bully, aiming a blow at the lad in
+front of him. Jack stepped quickly back, Jerry nearly lost his
+balance and just saved himself from falling.
+
+"You're a coward!" cried Jerry angrily.
+
+"I am, eh?" cried Jack. "Well, if I must fight I'm going to do it for
+all I'm worth!"
+
+The next instant he had his coat off, and was ready to defend
+himself. Jerry, nothing loath, closed in, and there in the darkness,
+illuminated only by the stars, the fight began.
+
+Jerry was well built and strong, but he had little science. On the
+contrary, though Jack was not as muscular nor as heavy as his
+antagonist, he more than made up for it in his quickness and his
+ability to hit hard. Jerry came up with a rush, and aimed a vicious
+blow at Jack's face. Jack cleverly dodged it, and countered, landing
+on Jerry's chin with a force that made the bully see stars.
+
+"I'll pay you for that!" he cried.
+
+He would have done better to have kept quiet, since he took his
+attention from Jack's fists, which, in the darkness, were hard enough
+to see at best. A second later Jerry found his nose stopping a solid
+blow, straight from the shoulder.
+
+"Ow!" yelled Jerry, in spite of himself.
+
+Then he clenched with Jack, and the two went at it rough-and-tumble.
+Jack got in a number of good blows, and Jerry tried his best to get
+away and deliver some in return. He did manage to punch Jack on the
+body, causing that worthy's breath to come in gasps.
+
+Back and forth went the fighters, the two spectators dancing about to
+see all they could of it, They kept their word not to interfere, and
+it was a fair struggle between Jack and Jerry.
+
+Though Jack did his best he could not avoid getting some severe
+blows, and one, on his eye, he felt had done considerable damage. But
+he more than paid Jerry back for it, and, in a little while the bully
+was fairly howling for mercy.
+
+"Help!" he cried. "He's not fighting fair."
+
+"Don't be a baby!" Jerry's friends called to him, somewhat disgusted
+with his actions. "Give it to him!"
+
+Jerry made one more effort to deal Jack a blow that would win the
+victory, but in his eagerness he lowered his guard. Our hero shot out
+a swift left, and it landed full on Jerry's chin. He staggered for a
+second, and then went down in a heap.
+
+He was up again in a couple of seconds, not much the worse, but all
+the fight was gone out of him. He held his head in his hands for a
+while, and then fairly ran up the dark street, while his two friends,
+surprised at the sudden outcome of the fight, followed more slowly.
+
+"I'll get even with you yet!" Jerry called back.
+
+"Well, if you do I still will have the satisfaction of knowing that I
+trounced you good and proper," Jack said, as he held a cold stone to
+his bruised eye.
+
+Just then, from across the lots there came a hail:
+
+"Hey, Jack! Where are you?"
+
+"Coming," was Jack's reply.
+
+He heard some one running toward him as he began to pick up his coat,
+and put on his hat.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+A GRAND WIND UP
+
+
+"What's the matter?" demanded John Smith, as he and Nat joined their
+comrade.
+
+"Did you get lost?" asked Nat.
+
+"No, only sort of delayed," answered Jack.
+
+"What makes you talk so funny?" inquired John.
+
+"I expect it's because my lips are swollen," was the reply.
+
+"Did some one hold you up and try to rob you?" cried Nat, in alarm.
+
+"Well, it was a hold-up, but no robbery," said Jack, and then he
+related what had happened.
+
+"Why didn't you yell for help?" asked John. "We'd have come back."
+
+"I didn't need any," replied Jack. "It was a fair fight enough. I
+guess he'll not forget that one on the chin in a hurry," and he
+laughed in spite of his swollen lips and blackened eye.
+
+"Much damaged?" asked Nat.
+
+"I'm afraid I've got a shiner," Jack replied. "They're sure to notice
+it at the Hall, and what will I say?"
+
+"Steal their thunder," advised John. "Let's hurry back, and report at
+once to the doctor."
+
+"Good idea," spoke Jack.
+
+They made good time back to the academy, and arrived a little before
+eleven.
+
+"Dr. Mead says I'm to mark down just the time you come in," said
+Martin, the monitor.
+
+"That's right," agreed Jack. "Is the doctor in his study?"
+
+"I believe he is."
+
+"We want to see him," went on Jack.
+
+"Been fighting." said Martin to himself. "My, my! What boys they are!
+Always into something!"
+
+"Come in!" called the head of the Academy in answer to Jack's knock
+on his door, and the three lads entered.
+
+"Ah, Ranger! And Smith and Anderson. Well, what can I do--Ha!
+Fighting, eh!" and the tone that had been a genial one became stern.
+
+"Yes, sir," admitted Jack boldly. "I came to tell you all about it,
+before you heard a garbled report from some one else."
+
+Then he related exactly what had happened, Nat and John confirming
+what he said. The boys' stories were so evidently true that Dr. Mead
+could but believe them.
+
+"That's enough," he said when Jack had finished. "I believe you.
+Don't let it--well, there, I don't suppose it was your fault.
+Fighting is a bad business--but then--well boys, now get to bed. You
+have plenty of hard work before you go in the next week with all the
+examinations. Good night!"
+
+"Good night!" echoed the lads.
+
+"That was the best way out," agreed Jack, when they were in the
+corridor. "Now I've got to get some vinegar and brown paper for this
+optic or I'll look a sight to-morrow."
+
+Examinations held sway for nearly a week thereafter. But "it's a long
+lane that has no turning" and, at last there came a time when the
+boys could say:
+
+"To-morrow's the last day of school."
+
+The term was at an end, and the whole academy was in a ferment over
+it. The students were busy packing their belongings, the graduates
+had already departed, and there was almost as much excitement as at
+the annual football or baseball games with a rival institution.
+
+The night before the day of the closing exercises, Jack's room was a
+gathering place for all his chums. Fred Kaler was so excited he tried
+to played a mouth organ, a jews'-harp and a tin flute, all at the
+same time, with results anything but musical, while Will Slade
+stuttered as he never had before.
+
+"What will we do for a final wind-up?" asked Sam.
+
+"Let it be something worthy of the name of Washington Hall,"
+exclaimed Jack.
+
+"We ought to work Professors Garlach and Socrat into it somehow,"
+suggested Bony. "They're more fun than a bunch of monkeys."
+
+"Get 'em to fight another duel," put in Sam.
+
+"They'd suspect something leading up to that," spoke John Smith.
+
+"Let's see if we can't make one outdo the other in politeness."
+suggested Jack. "I have a sort of scheme."
+
+"Trot it out!" demanded Sam.
+
+"I'll get Garlach to write Socrat a note," said Jack.
+
+"Where's the fun in that?" asked Bony.
+
+"Then I'll have Socrat send a little missive to Garlach."
+
+"What's the answer?" demanded Nat.
+
+"Garlach will write in French and Socrat will pen a few lines in
+German, and I'll tell 'em what to write," Jack went on. "Do you see
+my drift, as the snow bank said to the wind?"
+
+"Good!" exclaimed Sam. "Go ahead."
+
+The boys soon got together over the plan, and Jack was given plenty
+of suggestions to perfect it. He made up a number of sample notes,
+and then, being satisfied, he announced:
+
+"Now I'm going to start in. Just hang around, you fellows, and see
+what happens."
+
+It was about nine o'clock, but as it was the night before the last
+day of school, hardly any of the teachers or the pupils had thought
+of going to bed.
+
+Jack went to Professor Garlach's room. He found the instructor busy
+packing up his books preparatory to the vacation.
+
+"Ach! It iss young Ranger!" exclaimed the German instructor.
+"Velcome. Come in. It is goot to see you."
+
+"Thanks, Professor," said Jack. "I suppose you are all ready for the
+long rest?"
+
+"Sure I am, Ranger."
+
+"Well, we all are. I saw Professor Socrat packing up as I came past."
+
+At the mention of the French teacher's name Professor Garlach seemed
+to bristle up. There was always more or less ill feeling between them
+on account of their nationalities, but of late it was especially
+acute.
+
+"Ach! Speak not of him!" growled Garlach.
+
+"I think he wants to make friends with you," went on Jack, trying not
+to smile. "In fact he said as much to me. He said he would like to
+write you a farewell note and apologize for anything that might have
+given you offense."
+
+The German's manner changed. Jack was speaking the truth, though he
+had been instrumental in bringing the matter about. He had previously
+paid a visit to Socrat, and, broaching the subject of the cold
+feeling between the two teachers had suggested that it would be a
+fine thing if Mr. Socrat would say he was sorry for it, and would do
+all in his power to heal the breach.
+
+It was no easy task to bring this about, but Jack had a winning way
+with him, and really made the Frenchman believe it was more a favor
+on his part to apologize than it was of Mr. Garlach to accept it. In
+the end Professor Socrat had agreed to write a little note to his
+former enemy.
+
+"Only I know not ze Germaine language," he said.
+
+"That's all right, I'll do it for you," said Jack. "I can fix it up."
+
+"Then write ze note and I sign heem," said the Frenchman.
+
+"So he vill my pardon ask, iss it?" inquired Mr. Garlach when Jack
+had explained to him.
+
+"I believe that's his intention. Why can't you two meet out in the
+chapel and fix things up. Exchange letters so to speak. He's going to
+write to you in German, and you can write to him in French."
+
+"I know not de silly tongue!" grunted Mr. Garlach.
+
+"I'll write it for you," Jack said, turning aside his head to conceal
+a grin. "I'm pretty good at French."
+
+"Den you may do so," said Mr. Garlach. "I haf no objections to
+accepting his apologies, and being friends mit him."
+
+"Then here's the note," said Jack, handing over one he had prepared.
+"Sign it and be in the chapel in ten minutes. Mr. Socrat will be
+there, and we'll have a sort of farewell service."
+
+"Fine!" exclaimed the German. "Und we vill sing 'Der Wacht am
+Rhein!'"
+
+"And maybe the 'Marseilles,' too," added Jack softly as he went to
+deliver a note written in German to Mr. Socrat. The missives had cost
+him and the other boys no little thought.
+
+"Now, you fellows want to lay low if you expect to see the fun,"
+cautioned Jack to his chums, when he returned and told of his
+success. "Garlach and Socrat will be here in about ten minutes. There
+must be only a few of us around. Bony, I'll depend on you to act when
+I give the signal."
+
+"I'll be there," promised Bony.
+
+A little later all but a few of the boys had concealed themselves
+behind benches in the chapel. Jack was out of sight but could see
+what was going on, A few students stood conversing in one corner.
+
+Mr. Socrat was the first to enter. He came in, holding a note in his
+hand.
+
+"It is now zat I prove ze politeness of ze French," he murmured.
+
+A moment later Mr. Garlach entered from the other side.
+
+"Goot effning, Herr Socrates," he said, with a stiff bow.
+
+"Bon jour!" exclaimed Mr. Socrat. "Only, if it pleases you my dear
+Professor Garlick, my name ees wizout ze final syllable."
+
+"Und mine it iss Garla-a-ach, und not like de leek vat you eat!"
+exclaimed the German.
+
+"They're off!" said Jack in a whisper to Sam.
+
+"Your pardon!" came from Mr. Socrat. "I am in error. But I have here
+a note in which I wish to greet you wiz the happiness of parting. It
+iss in your own language!"
+
+"Ach! So! I too have a missive for you," went on Mr. Garlach,
+somewhat modified. "It iss in your tongue as I belief, but I am not
+so goot in it as perhaps you are."
+
+"It is charming of you," spoke Mr. Socrat, bowing low. The two
+professors exchanged notes, and then stepped over to a flaring
+gaslight where they could read them.
+
+"Now watch out!" exclaimed Jack.
+
+"Ha!" cried the German. "Vas ist dis?"
+
+"Pah!" cried Mr. Socrat. "Diable! I am insult!"
+
+"Dot Frenchman iss von pig-hog!" came from Mr. Garlach.
+
+"See! So I will treat ze writair!" exclaimed Mr. Socrat, tearing the
+note to shreds and stamping on the pieces.
+
+"I vill crush the frog-eater as I do dis letter!" muttered Mr.
+Garlach, as he twisted the slip of paper into a shapeless mass and
+tossed it into the air.
+
+"Scoundrel!" hissed Mr. Socrat
+
+"Vile dog vat you iss!" came from Mr. Garlach.
+
+Then, unable to restrain their feelings any longer they rushed at
+each other.
+
+"Ready!" called Jack, and the next instant the lights went out,
+leaving the chapel in darkness.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+HO! FOR THE WEST!
+
+
+For a few seconds there was the sound of a confused stumbling about.
+Blows were struck, but they seemed to land on desks and tables.
+Mingled with them were the murmurs of strong French and German words,
+and the heavy breathing of the two teachers.
+
+Then, as the door at the farther end of the room opened, allowing
+light from the hall to come in, a voice asked:
+
+"What's the matter?'
+
+"Matter enough! I am terrible insult!" exclaimed Mr. Socrat from
+behind a table where he was crouching.
+
+"I must be apologized by alretty!" muttered Mr. Garlach, in deep
+tones.
+
+"What is this all about?" demanded Dr. Mead, who had made the first
+inquiry. "What does it mean?"
+
+"Ach! I vill tell you!" spoke the German teacher.
+
+"I will leave at once razzer zan stay where he iss!" came from the
+Frenchman.
+
+"Come to my office," said Dr, Mead. "I am afraid it's another of the
+boys' pranks."
+
+The two Instructors, muttering against each other, followed the head
+of the academy down the corridor.
+
+"Now's our chance to sneak!" exclaimed Jack. "Say, it was the best
+ever!"
+
+"What was in the notes that made them so mad?" asked Sam.
+
+"Why, the one Garlach got stated that the Germans were a race of
+thieves and robbers and would never be anything better. Professor
+Garlach, on the other hand, seemed to have written to his French
+friend that the latter nation was nothing but a lot of long-legged
+frog-eaters, who were more ladies than they were men!"
+
+"No wonder they went up into the air!" exclaimed Bony Balmore. "It
+was like a match to gunpowder."
+
+"Lucky we could turn the lights out," commented Nat Anderson, "or
+they'd be fighting yet."
+
+"Maybe they will have a duel," suggested
+ John Smith.
+
+But in some way Dr. Mead managed to patch matters up. Nor was any
+punishment visited on the boys. The doctor evidently made allowances
+for the closing of school, and the consequent slacking of discipline
+that was bound to occur. The next day, though the French and German
+professors glared more darkly than usual at each other, there was no
+reference to the notes.
+
+The closing exercises were soon over and then, after a few formal
+words of farewell for the term from Dr. Mead, Washington Hall was
+declared closed until the fall.
+
+"Whoop!" yelled Jack, as he came with a rush from chapel where the
+final program had been rendered. "Hold me down, someone!"
+
+"I will!" exclaimed Nat, jumping on his chum's back, and bearing him
+to the earth.
+
+"I'll help!" cried several, and soon half a dozen had piled upon
+Jack, in the middle of the campus.
+
+"Down!" he cried, half smothered. "That's enough!"
+
+"Fall in line for a grand march!" shouted Fred Kaler, as he tooted on
+a tin fife. "L-l-M-let m-m-m-me--l-l-l--Pzzant!" spluttered Will.
+"Let me lead!"
+
+"Too late!" cried Sam, as he ran out and got at the head of the
+impromptu procession.
+
+"Came on and get Socrat and Garlach in line!" called Jack. "We'll
+make 'em march side by side and forget all their troubles."
+
+The idea was received with shouts of laughter.
+ Off the lads started on a run for the rooms of the two professors.
+
+"Come on!" cried Jack to Mr. Garlach.
+
+"Ach! Vat iss it now?" inquired the instructor, vainly struggling
+against the hold Jack had of him. "You boys vill drive me to
+distraction!"
+
+"Got to take part in the grand march!" went on Jack.
+
+Before Mr. Garlach knew what was happening, he found himself being
+hustled out of his chambers and fairly carried along in a rush of the
+students.
+
+Sam Chalmers had in the meanwhile gone to Professor Socrat's study.
+
+"Come on!" he cried. "Take part in the grand salute to the French
+flag."
+
+"La belle France!" cried the teacher. "Vive l' Republic!"
+
+"That's the cheese!" fairly shouted Sam. "Hurry up!"
+
+And, before Professor Socrat could catch his breath he found himself
+being hurried along the corridor and out on the campus.
+
+"Hurrah for France!" cried a score of voices.
+
+"My compliments!" exclaimed Mr. Socrat, bowing low to the assemblage
+of students.
+
+"Long may the German flag wave!" came another cry.
+
+"Ach! Dot is goot to mine heart!" said Mr. Garlach.
+
+"Zat is an insult to me!" spluttered the Frenchman, as Sam hurried
+him on.
+
+"Don't mind 'em. They don't know what they're saying," was Sam's
+comment.
+
+"Vy do they shout for dot frog-eating nation?" inquired Mr. Garlach
+of Jack.
+
+"Mistake I guess," was the reply. "The boys are not very good on
+language yet."
+
+Then, before either of the instructors could protest, they found
+themselves side by side, being carried along in a press of students
+who marched around the academy, singing at the top of their voices,
+and each one rendering a different air.
+
+"Whoop! Isn't this great!" shouted Jack in Nat's ear.
+
+"The best ever!" was the answer. "It only happens once in a
+lifetime!"
+
+But all things must have an end, and at last the grand march came to
+a close. The students fairly outdid themselves, and had to halt every
+now and then to rest from the combined exertion of laughing and
+leaping as they paraded.
+
+"Three cheers for Washington Hall!" called Jack.
+
+The volume of sound was deafening.
+
+"Now three for Professor Garlach!"
+
+How the boys did yell. The professor looked as pleased as a lad with
+his first pair of trousers, and bowed low to Mr. Socrat whom he had
+detected in the act of cheering for him,
+
+"Three cheers for Professor Socrat!" yelled Jack.
+
+Mr. Garlach joined in the cries for his late enemy, and then the two
+teachers shook hands, while the boys cheered again.
+
+"Now good loud ones for Dr. Mead and all the rest of the teachers!"
+called Jack, and by this time the cheering habit was so implanted
+that the lads cheered everything they could think of from vacation to
+Socker the janitor.
+
+Now the crowd began to break up. Several students found they must
+catch trains, and there were general leave takings. Good-byes were
+being said on every side, and there were many promises to write
+letters and keep up new friendships or cement old ones.
+
+Jack found so many wanting to bid him farewell for the term that he
+was kept busy shaking hands, and the number of boys he promised to
+let hear from him during vacation would have kept two private
+secretaries busy.
+
+Finally, however, matters began to quiet down. Most of the students
+had left the campus to pack up their belongings while a number had
+already departed for home. Jack, Nat Anderson and John Smith found
+themselves alone at least for a few minutes.
+
+"Well, this is like old times," said Jack.
+
+"Wow!" exclaimed John in true Indian tone. "Heap big time!"
+
+"Reminds me of a circus broken loose," commented Nat. "But say, Jack,
+our train goes in an hour. Are we going to take it or stay over--"
+
+"Not on your life!" exclaimed Jack. "Washington Hall will be as
+lonesome as a desert island in about an hour and I'm off."
+
+"I think I'll go also," said John.
+
+"Now, about our western trip," put in Nat. "Where will we connect
+with you. John?"
+
+"Well," replied the Indian student. "I am going up to Canada to pay a
+short visit to some friends of my father's, who were very kind to him
+before he died. I think I will be with you in a week, and I can come
+on to Denton."
+
+"That will do first-rate," said Nat. "Jack and I will be on the
+lookout for you. We'll be ready to start in a week, I guess."
+
+"The sooner the better for me," put in Jack.
+
+"That's so, I forgot you are anxious to solve the mystery of your
+father's disappearance," Nat said. "Well, perhaps we can hurry a
+bit."
+
+"No, I guess that time will be about right," Jack went on. "I'll have
+to spend some time with my aunts, and I want to have a talk with
+Judge Bennett and get some further details. I guess we'll let it
+stand at a week."
+
+"Well, good-bye until then," said John, shaking hands with his two
+friends, and he was soon on his way to the Rudmore station. The
+others followed a little later. Several hours' riding found Jack and
+Nat at Denton.
+
+"I wonder if they'll have the brass band out to meet us," suggested
+Jack.
+
+"Perpetual porous plasters! They would if they only knew what a
+reputation we have achieved!" exclaimed Nat, as the train rolled in.
+"Hello, there's some of your folks!"
+
+"That's so! My three aunts!" cried Jack, as he saw from the window
+the three maiden ladies with whom he had lived so long. Aunt Mary
+caught a glimpse of him, and waved her handkerchief, an example that
+was followed by the other two. The next instant Jack was being hugged
+and kissed as though he had been away ten years instead of a few
+months.
+
+"We were so afraid the train would be late, or that you wouldn't come
+until the night one," said Aunt Josephine.
+
+"Couldn't think of staying away from you any longer," Jack replied,
+his eyes a trifle moist as he realized the love his aunts bore toward
+him, and he hugged and kissed them in turn.
+
+"So long!" called Nat, as he walked up the station platform. "I'll
+see you later. Got to pack for our trip."
+
+The next few days were busy ones for Jack. In the first place he had
+to tell his aunts all about his school experience, that is such parts
+of it as he thought they might care to hear and this took time. Then
+he had to see Judge Bennett, and the family lawyer explained further
+details about Jack's father. Jack also asked the judge for the
+curious ring, as he thought he might have to use it on his western
+trip.
+
+"You must take good care of it, Jack," the lawyer said. "No telling
+what may hinge on it."
+
+"If anyone gets it away from me he'll have the hardest proposition he
+ever tackled," Jack said earnestly.
+
+In fact our hero was kept so busy, between this, arranging for his
+trip, and renewing his acquaintances with the town boys, that he was
+all unprepared when, one day, John Smith rang the door bell.
+
+"Well, where in the world did you come from?" asked Jack.
+
+"Straight from Canada. Didn't you get my letter?"
+
+"By Jove! So I did, but I clean forgot to-day was Friday. Come right
+in."
+
+Jack's aunts graciously received John, whom they welcomed for the
+part his father had played in the life of Mr. Ranger. It was decided
+that the Indian student should stay at Jack's house until Monday,
+when the start for the west was to be made.
+
+Jack's aunts had, after an effort, given their consent to his making
+the western trip. More particularly as they felt it might lead to the
+discovering of his father. Once they got to this point it was clear
+sailing and they helped Jack to pack up.
+
+There were final instructions from Judge Bennett to Jack. There were
+good-byes, said over a dozen times, from the aunts. There were
+farewell calls from a host of boys who envied Jack, Nat and John the
+experience they were about to have.
+
+At last, though it seemed it moved on leaden feet, Monday came, and,
+at least an hour before train time, the three boys started for the
+depot. They had valises with them, but their trunks had been sent on
+ahead.
+
+"Bounding buffaloes and copper-colored cowboys!" exclaimed Nat, as
+the whistle of the train sounded. "Here she comes!"
+
+"Well, I'm glad of it," observed Jack. "I was getting tired waiting
+for it."
+
+"It will seem good to get out on a range again," spoke John. "I'm
+counting on it."
+
+"Westward ho!" cried Jack, as he jumped aboard the train, and waved
+his hand in farewell to his aunts, while the other two boys shook
+their hats in the air in salute to several lads who had come to see
+them off.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE
+
+
+The boys, under the advice of Judge Bennett, had planned to go to
+Chicago. From there they would take a train on another road, which
+made connections with the line that would land them in Denver. From
+Denver they had to change to still another railway to get to
+Fillmore, the nearest station to Denville. Nat's uncle had promised
+to meet them there a week from the day they started, since he wanted
+to allow them plenty of time to get to Colorado, and there were
+sometimes delays in connecting with trains.
+
+From Fillmore the lads were to be driven about twenty miles to where
+Mr. Kent's ranch was located. He had written to Nat that in case he
+was not in Fillmore when the boys arrived they were to put up at a
+hotel and wait for him. Also, in case they missed connections and
+were late in getting there, he would wait for them.
+
+"We want to try and find where Orion Tevis is located," said Jack,
+"and to do this we will have to go to the Capital Bank in Denver.
+That may take a little time, as we may have to prove our identity."
+
+"Ought to be easy to do that with the rings you and John have,"
+answered Nat, the Indian student having secured his gold circlet from
+Dr. Mead, who had been keeping it for him.
+
+"It may be and it may not," John said.
+
+"There are a lot of things mixed up in this affair, and no one can
+see how it will turn out. But I don't expect any trouble in getting
+Mr. Tevis's address. The hard part will be to find him."
+
+"I'll find him if it's possible," Jack put in. "I want to end my
+father's wanderings and bring him back with me."
+
+"And I'll help all I can, and I know my uncle will, too," said Nat,
+with ready sympathy.
+
+The boys had arranged themselves comfortably in the train, which, by
+this time, had speeded several miles from Denton. The car was not
+well filled as it was early and no large cities had been reached. As
+station after station was passed, however, passengers began to take
+the seats until the cars were comfortably filled.
+
+The boys had taken passage in a through sleeper to Chicago, and got
+their meals in the dining car ahead. They had supper in Scranton,
+where the train waited about half an hour to connect with another. As
+the boys came back to their seats in the sleeper, which had not yet
+been made up, they saw several new passengers.
+
+One was a tall, rather rough looking man, who seemed to have suddenly
+acquired wealth. His clothes were good but did not fit him well, and
+he seemed ill at ease in them. There was a big diamond in his shirt
+front, and he had a heavy gold chain across his vest.
+
+"Guess I'm entitled to the best that's goin'," he said in a loud tone
+as he sat in one seat and put his big feet up in the one opposite.
+"I've paid for this whole section an' I'm going to use it. I ain't
+worked hard all my life for nothing. Just sold my share in a coal
+mine," he said to the boys, whose seats were near his. "Now I'm going
+to enjoy myself. Going to the 'Windy City'! that's what I am. Got
+friends in Chicago that'll be glad to see me an' my pile," and he
+pulled out a big role of bills. "My name's Josh Post, an I'm set in
+my ways," he added.
+
+The boys did not make any answer, but, at the sound of the big man's
+voice a passenger in the seat ahead of him turned and looked to see
+who was speaking. As he did so the former mine owner happened to be
+displaying his money, and the eyes of the other passenger gleamed in
+a dangerous sort of way.
+
+As he turned around to get a glimpse of the miner, Jack got a look at
+the face of the passenger who had shown such curiosity. The boy
+started. "Where have I seen him before?" he thought to himself. "I
+can't seem to place him." Then he leaned over and whispered to Nat.
+"Make an excuse to go to the end of the car, and on your way back
+take a look at the man in the first seat."
+
+"All right," said Nat, who did not ask the reason. A little later he
+sauntered to the water cooler. He could hardly repress a start as he
+passed the man Jack had mentioned.
+
+"Know him?" asked Jack, when his chum had regained his seat.
+
+"Sure, in spite of his disguise, his new way of wearing his hair, and
+the fact that he has shaved off his moustache."
+
+"Marinello Booghoobally?" asked Jack, in low tones.
+
+"Otherwise known as Hemp Smith," whispered Jack. "I wonder what he's
+up to now."
+
+"I shouldn't be surprised if he would like to annex the roll of one
+Mr. Josh Post," observed Nat. "We'd better keep our eyes pealed. Put
+John next to the game."
+
+Thereupon the Indian student was told the story of the man who had
+posed as an Oriental mystic and a professor of whatever he thought he
+could delude people into believing, as it suited his fancy, and
+netted him cash.
+
+"We certainly got the best of him in the haunted house affair," said
+Jack. "Guess the professor won't tackle another job like that in
+hurry," and he silently laughed as he thought of the trick (told of
+in the first volume) the students played on the fakir when a
+phonograph was used to produce ghostly noises.
+
+"Yes, sir, I'm out for a good time," said Mr. Post, as if some one
+had doubted his word. "Where you boys going?"
+
+"Out west," replied Jack, thinking it would do no harm to reply
+civilly to Mr. Post.
+
+"Excuse me for coming into this conversation," spoke Marinello
+Booghoobally, otherwise Hemp Smith. "I'm going out west myself, and
+if I can do anything to help you boys or you, Mr. Post, I'll be only
+too glad to do so."
+
+"Help yourself to our money and his too, I guess," murmured Jack.
+
+"Well now, that's kind of you, stranger," said Mr. Post, who seemed
+ready to accept any one as a friend. "What might your name be?"
+
+"It might be almost anything I guess," muttered Nat. "Let's hear what
+he says. I wonder how he got here, anyhow."
+
+"I'm Professor Punjab," replied Hemp Smith. "As you can understand by
+my name I am from East India, but I have been here so long I have
+acquired some of the habits."
+
+"Most of the bad ones," said Jack, under his breath.
+
+"What do you work at?" asked Mr. Post.
+
+"Work? I do not work," replied the fakir. "I am what you might call a
+mind reader, a mystic, a foreteller of future events."
+
+"Ain't no mesmerizer, are you?" asked Mr. Post.
+
+"Yes, I can do that also," replied Professor Punjab. "Shall I give
+you a sample?"
+
+"I'd rather have you give me a sample of your fortune telling," said
+the miner. "What's going to happen now?"
+
+Professor Punjab seemed to go into a deep thought trance. Then he
+gave a sudden start.
+
+"The train is going to stop quickly because there is an obstruction
+on the track!" he exclaimed.
+
+An instant later, to the surprise of the boys, no less than Mr. Post,
+there was a quick application of the air brakes, so much so that the
+passengers were nearly thrown from their seats. Then with a grinding
+and shrieking the train came to a stop.
+
+"What did I tell you?" inquired Professor Punjab.
+
+"Well I'll be horn-swoggled!" exclaimed Mr. Post.
+
+"What's the matter?" asked several travelers.
+
+The boys had hurried to the front of the car. They were met by a
+brakeman.
+
+"Don't be alarmed," he said. "There is no danger."
+
+"What was the trouble?" asked Jack.
+
+"There was some obstruction on the track, a couple of ties, I
+believe, that fell from a passing flat car," the brakeman explained.
+"The engineer saw it and stopped just in time."
+
+Professor Punjab pulled a book from his pocket and began to read, as
+if prophesying that trains would suddenly stop was the most natural
+thing in the world.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+PROFESSOR PUNJAB'S TRICK
+
+
+"Well, I call that goin' some," spoke Mr. Post. "If you can do that
+just sitting still I wonder what you can do when you begin moving"
+
+"A mere trifle," said Professor Punjab. "I will be pleased to give
+you a further evidence of my powers later on. But now I am fatigued.
+I have studied hard to-day on the great mystery of the future life,
+and I find I must take a little nourishment,--very little. A bit of
+cracker and a glass of water," and with that he went forward to the
+dining car.
+
+"Yes, I'd just like to see him get along with a cracker and a glass
+of water," murmured Jack. "I'll bet corned beef and cabbage is more
+in his line."
+
+"But how do you suppose he knew the train was going to stop?" asked
+Ned speaking aloud. "That looks queer."
+
+"He's a wonder, that's what he is," said Mr. Post. "I want to see
+some more of him," and he got up to go back to the smoking
+compartment, leaving the three boys alone in the forward part of the
+car.
+
+"Maybe he just made a guess at it," put in John Smith. "I've seen
+some of our Indian medicine men pretend to prophesy and it turned out
+they only made good guesses."
+
+"Perhaps he did." Nat admitted.
+
+Jack had moved over to the seat vacated by Professor Punjab. He
+pressed his face close to the window and looked ahead. As he did so
+he uttered an exclamation.
+
+"Come here, John and Nat!" he said in a low tone. "This will explain
+how it was done."
+
+The two boys took turns looking from the window.
+
+"See it?" asked Jack.
+
+"Sure!" they chorused.
+
+"We were just rounding that curve," Jack went on. "He happened to
+look from the window and he saw the ties on the track. Any one could
+as the electric light from that freight station is right over them.
+He knew the engineer would stop in a hurry, and, sure enough, he did.
+It's easy when you know how, isn't it?"
+
+"But it certainly was strange enough when he made that statement, and
+then to have the train slack up," spoke Nat. "I was beginning to
+believe that, maybe, after all, he had some strange power."
+
+"He's a fakir clear through," was Jack's opinion. "You wait a bit and
+you'll see him try some trick on this miner. He's after his money."
+
+"We ought to put a stop to that," said Nat, "Galloping greenbacks!
+But we don't want to see the man robbed, even if he isn't as nice and
+polite as he might be."
+
+"And we'll not, either," remarked Jack. "We'll be on the lookout, and
+maybe we can make Professor Hemp Smith Punjab wish he hadn't traveled
+on this line."
+
+The ties on the track were soon cleared away and the train resumed
+its journey. The porter came in to make up the berths, and while this
+was being done the three boys had to take seats in other sections of
+the car.
+
+In the meanwhile Professor Punjab returned. He was picking his teeth
+as though he had dined more substantially than on a mere wafer and a
+sip of water.
+
+"You boys going far?" he asked.
+
+"Quite a way," replied Jack in a low voice. He was afraid the former
+experience the man had passed through might be recalled to him if he
+ heard the voices of the students, and so did not use his natural
+tones.
+
+But Professor Punjab did not seem at all suspicious. Besides he had
+never had a good look at the boys, and there was so much talking
+going on the time they played the trick on him it is doubtful if he
+remembered any one's voice.
+
+"Where are you from?" the fakir asked next, but Jack was spared the
+necessity of replying by the return of Mr. Post from the smoking
+compartment.
+
+"Well, well, Professor," the miner said, "that certainly was a slick
+trick of yours. Haven't any more of 'em up your sleeve, have you?"
+
+"That was no trick," returned the "professor" in an injured tone. "I
+do not descend to tricks. If I am gifted with certain powers I must
+use them. I can not help myself. There is something within me--some
+spirit--that moves me. I saw that the train would have to stop and I
+had to announce it."
+
+"You bet you saw it all right," muttered Jack. "So could any one else
+who had been sitting in your seat. It was easy."
+
+"No offense, no offense, Professor," muttered Mr. Post, seeing he had
+made a mistake. "I'm much interested in this thing."
+
+"I welcome real interest in my work," the fakir went on, "I will be
+happy to illustrate matters to you as far as my poor talents enable
+me to. You have perhaps heard of the celebrated Indian manifestation
+of making a plant grow in a few hours?"
+
+"Not guilty," said Mr. Post solemnly.
+
+"Then these young gentlemen have," the professor went on, turning to
+the three boys.
+
+Jack nodded silently.
+
+"It is a strange power that we mystics have over the forces of
+nature," the pretended philosopher went on. "We have but to plant a
+seed in the soil, and, lo! a plant bearing fruit shoots up."
+
+"That would be a good thing to sell to farmers," said Mr. Post.
+
+"It can not be sold. Only an adept can perform it," said Professor
+Punjab. "I would do it for you, only the conditions are not just
+right here. But I can, perhaps, show you something you probably never
+saw before."
+
+With a flourish he drew from his pocket a large black handkerchief.
+This he shook to show there was nothing in it. He spread it over his
+extended left arm, which was crooked at the elbow. Then he placed his
+right hand under it, and brought out a large orange.
+
+"Well I'll be blowed!" exclaimed Mr. Post.
+
+"Ain't got any more of 'em there, have you, Professor?"
+
+"There is only one," was the reply, as the man returned the
+handkerchief to his pocket and passed the orange to Mr. Post. "It is
+difficult to produce one, I assure you."
+
+"Not when you have them concealed in your coat, where you probably
+put it when you were in the dining car," was Jack's comment, made to
+himself.
+
+"Well you're a wonder," exclaimed the miner. "I'd like to take
+lessons off you."
+
+"I can impart the secrets to only those of the inner circle," said
+the professor, with an air of great wisdom. "But I am allowed to show
+those who appreciate my doings some of the workings of my art.
+Perhaps you would like to see a little more of what I am able to do."
+
+"I sure would," replied Mr. Post.
+
+"What I am about to do," Professor Punjab went on, "is so remarkable
+that I am allowed to show it to but one person at a time. Therefore I
+invite you, Mr. Post, into the smoking compartment with me. Later I
+will be glad to show my young friends, one at a time."
+
+"Not any for mine," muttered Jack, as the miner, who was much
+interested in what he had seen, followed the fakir to the compartment
+he had recently left.
+
+"I wonder what he's up to," said Nat, when the two were out of
+hearing.
+
+"Something crooked, on the professor's part, you can make up your
+mind," Jack answered.
+
+"Let's find out what it is," suggested Nat.
+
+"How?" inquired Jack.
+
+"I think I can manage it," put in John Smith. "I have very good
+hearing, and I can move around easily. Suppose I go and hide near the
+compartment. Maybe I can hear what they say."
+
+"Good!" exclaimed Jack. "Then you come back and tell us, and we'll
+see what we can do in the way of tricks."
+
+John put on a pair of moccasins he had in his valise, and moved
+through the aisle, now completely hemmed in with the curtains from
+the various berths. The other boys began to undress within their
+narrow sections but they did not take off all their clothes, so as to
+be in readiness for whatever should happen.
+
+Jack managed to get into an unoccupied berth next to the smoking
+compartment. By placing his ears to the partition he could just
+distinguish what the professor was saying to Mr. Post.
+
+"Well, that's about the limit!" John exclaimed softly to himself. "I
+think we can spoil that proposition for him."
+
+Having learned all he wanted to know, the Indian lad returned to his
+friends.
+
+"Professor Punjab is planning to get possession of the miner's money,"
+he said in whispers, as the three boys held an impromptu conference
+in the lavatory, where Nat and Jack had gone to clean their teeth
+before retiring.
+
+"How's he going to do it?" asked Jack.
+
+"He has told Mr. Post that he has the power of making money increase
+over night," John explained. "He says if a certain sum is put in a
+mysterious box which he has, it will be doubled in the morning."
+
+"And the miner believed him?" asked Jack.
+
+"Sure. He agreed to put his roll in the box the fakir has, and it is
+to be placed under Mr. Post's berth. He is not to open it until
+morning."
+
+"And when he does it will be full of brown paper," said Jack. "I've
+read about such tricks."
+
+"It won't if we can help it," put in Nat. "I guess here is where we
+get busy."
+
+The boys held a further conference and agreed on a plan of action.
+They went back to their berths, and, a little later, they heard the
+fake professor and Mr. Post coming back from the smoking room.
+
+"Do I put it at the head or foot?" they heard the miner ask.
+
+"At the foot," replied the plotter.
+
+"So he can get it easier," muttered Jack.
+
+Nat's berth was right opposite that of Mr. Post, so it was arranged
+he was to do the main work. In a little while the sleeping car became
+a quiet place, and deep breathing from one berth after another told
+that the occupants were slumbering soundly. Pretty soon Nat heard a
+snore from the berth of the miner.
+
+"I'd better do it now, before Professor Punjab gets busy," he
+thought.
+
+Then with his umbrella, which had a crook for a handle, Nat reached
+out between the curtains and began to feel around under Mr. Post's
+bed for the box. He had to work cautiously, but at length his efforts
+were rewarded. He felt the umbrella crook fasten on the object, and
+he pulled it across the aisle toward him.
+
+When it was near enough he reached his hand down and took it up into
+his berth.
+
+"Have you got it?" asked Jack in a whisper from the next sleeping
+compartment.
+
+"Sure," replied Nat
+
+"Take out the money and put in our messages," Jack added, and Nat did
+so. Then he placed the box back where he had found it.
+
+In a short time the three boys, who were watching from behind their
+berth-curtains, saw a hand protrude from beneath the hangings around
+Professor Punjab's bed. The hand felt around a bit, and then went
+under Mr. Post's berth. In a few seconds it came out and the box was
+in it. A moment later it moved back again, and seemed to replace the
+box.
+
+"That's where he put a dummy in place of what he thinks is the one
+with the bills in," thought Nat, who was watching closely. "He'll
+skip out soon, I guess."
+
+His conjecture was right. A few minutes later Professor Punjab, who
+had not undressed, stole from his berth and walked softly to the end
+of the car.
+
+"I wonder if he'll jump off," thought Nat.
+
+But the fakir had no such intentions. The train began to slacken
+speed, as he probably knew it would, having to stop at a station,
+which fact he could ascertain by consulting a time-table. The cars
+came to a halt, with a grinding noise of the brakes, and Nat leaned
+over toward the window of his berth.
+
+He could see the station platform, and caught a glimpse of Professor
+Punjab as he jumped from the sleeper. Then, while the boy watched,
+the fakir opened the box he had in his hand.
+
+All he pulled out were three cards, on which were written the names
+of the three boys.
+
+"Fooled!" exclaimed Nat as the train started off leaving the
+professor, a picture of rage, on the platform.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+SHOOTING AN OIL WELL
+
+
+The professor made a move as though he was about to jump back on the
+train, but evidently thought better of it. He gave another look at
+the cards, and then put them into his pocket.
+
+"Looks as if he wanted to remember us," thought Nat.
+
+By that time the train moved so far ahead that the professor was no
+longer to be seen.
+
+"How about it?" asked Jack, sticking his head through his curtains
+over toward Ned's berth.
+
+"He was mad enough to bite a ten-penny nail in two," said Nat.
+
+"Did he find out he was fooled?" asked Jack, who had not been able to
+see the fakir from the car window.
+
+"I guess yes," spoke Nat, and he told Jack the details, which were
+related to John, who was in the berth beyond.
+
+"Had we better tell Mr. Post?" asked Nat.
+
+"Wait until morning," suggested Jack. "Keep the money safe though."
+
+"Right you are," came from Nat, and then the three boys quieted down
+and went to bed, though it was some time before they fell asleep, so
+full of excitement were they.
+
+They awoke early, and, without dressing kept watch on the berth where
+Mr. Post was sleeping. They thought he would soon awaken to see if
+his money had increased as he had foolishly taken the fakir's word
+that it would. It was hardly daylight before the boys saw a hand
+emerge from the miner's berth and grope under his bed.
+
+"Where is it?" they heard Mr. Post mutter.
+
+Then, as his fingers closed on the box which Professor Punjab had put
+in place of the one the miner had originally left, they could hear
+him exclaim:
+
+"Here's where I double my money!"
+
+About three seconds later there arose such a yell from Mr. Post's
+berth that the porter came running from his quarters in alarm.
+
+"Who's bin done committed murder?" the darky demanded.
+
+"Murder!" exclaimed Mr. Post. "I'll murder some one, that's what I
+will! Look out! I'm a bad man when I'm mad, and I'm mad clear through
+now!"
+
+"What's de matter?" asked the frightened negro. "Who done sumfin to
+yo', boss?"
+
+"Matter?" cried the miner. "I've been robbed, that's what's the
+matter. Did you take my money, you black rascal?" and Mr. Post leaped
+from his berth and made a jump for the porter.
+
+Just as he grabbed the negro by his kinky wool the conductor, who had
+been asleep in his berth, emerged. He was struck squarely by the
+porter, and the two went down in a heap in the aisle, with Mr. Post
+on top of them.
+
+"What's this all about?" inquired the conductor, as soon as matters
+had quieted down a bit.
+
+"I've been robbed, that's all," replied Mr. Post, who had partly
+dressed.
+
+"Tell me about it," demanded the conductor, and then the miner,
+realizing that he had been a bit foolish, explained the
+circumstances.
+
+"Serves you right for trusting a stranger," said the conductor.
+
+"But he said he was able to double my cash," protested Mr. Post.
+"I've got to have it back. It will ruin me to lose it."
+
+"Here it is," said Nat, who, with the other boys, had donned his
+clothes. He thought matters had gone far enough. "We had it for safe
+keeping," he explained.
+
+"Well douse my safety lamp! Where did you get it?" asked Mr. Post,
+his eyes big with wonder.
+
+Nat explained briefly, telling how he and his chums had watched
+Professor Punjab, and had fooled him.
+
+"Say, you boys are all to the good!" exclaimed the miner. "Saved my
+money for me, that's what you did. I didn't know I could be so
+foolish until I tried. Well, it will take a slick one to beat me
+again."
+
+Mr. Post began counting over his roll. Meanwhile the other passengers
+had gathered around, and the story became generally known.
+
+"Smart lads, them," commented an elderly man. "Ought to get a
+reward."
+
+"And that's what they will, too," put in the miner, overhearing the
+words. "Nobody can say Josh Post forgot a good action. Here's a
+couple of hundred for you."
+
+"No, thanks," said Nat firmly, and his companions shook their heads.
+"We can't take money for that. Besides, it was pay enough to fool the
+professor. We've had dealings with him before."
+
+Mr. Post tried to force the money on the boys, but they refused to
+listen to him, and he finally understood that there was a higher
+standard than cash to repay kindness.
+
+"Then shake hands!" he cried heartily, and the boys were almost sorry
+they consented, for the miner's grip was anything but a light one.
+However, he showed how much in earnest he was.
+
+"I'll never forget you boys," he said. "Josh Post never forgets a
+favor, and if ever you want a friend just you call on me."
+
+The boys thought little of this at the time, but there was an
+occasion when they remembered it and profited by it.
+
+The excitement over, the boys went to breakfast. Mr. Post insisted on
+going with them, and in fact he did not seem to want the boys out of
+his sight. He was continually referring to his narrow escape at the
+hands of the fake professor. The boys got to like him better as the
+hours passed, for he showed that he had a good heart, beneath a
+rather rough and repelling exterior.
+
+At noon the train arrived at the center of the Pennsylvania oil
+region. The evidences of the great industry were on every hand, and
+the sight of the tall derricks, the refineries, the storage tanks,
+and the pipes where natural gas was continually burning, were such
+interesting ones that the lads never grew tired of looking from the
+windows.
+
+They delayed longer than usual at a small station, and some of the
+passengers going out to see what the trouble was, reported that the
+locomotive had broken down and that it would take three hours to
+repair it.
+
+"Here's a chance to get out and see the country," suggested Jack.
+"What do you say?"
+
+"Fine," replied John. "I've always wanted to see an oil well."
+
+"Any objection to me going along?" asked Mr. Post, who had overheard
+the talk.
+
+"Guess not," replied Nat heartily. "Come along."
+
+The four had no sooner alighted from the train than a roughly-dressed
+man rushed up to the miner, grasped him by the hand, clapped him on
+the back with a sound like a small explosion, and exclaimed:
+
+"Don't tell me this is Josh Post!"
+
+"All right, Jim Baker, then I'll not do anything of the sort if you
+don't want me to," was the answer.
+
+"Well land of living! Where'd you come from?" asked Jim Baker.
+
+"Where you going?" demanded Mr. Post, not answering.
+
+"Going to do what I've been doing for the last ten years," was the
+reply. "Shoot a well."
+
+"So you're not dead yet?" asked Mr. Post.
+
+"The day isn't over," was the answer, "and I've got two big holes to
+drop the go-devil down."
+
+Then the two friends began to discuss old times with a vengeance,
+until the miner, suddenly remembering himself called a halt and
+cried:
+
+"Jim Baker, let me introduce you to three of the best friends I got.
+They saved a fool from being parted from his money," and, introducing
+the boys he explained what he meant.
+
+"You'd better get a nurse," said Mr. Baker sarcastically as his
+friend finished.
+
+"I've put an advertisement in for one. Got to be a good one though,
+to keep me straight."
+
+"Do you really shoot oil wells, with nitroglycerine, the way I've
+read about?" asked John Smith of Mr. Baker.
+
+"I sure do, son. Want to see me?"
+
+"I would like to, very much."
+
+"Excuse me," put in Mr. Post. "I think I hear some one calling me,"
+and he made as if to hurry away.
+
+"There's not a bit of danger," called Mr. Baker. "Hold on, Josh,
+better come along."
+
+"Guarantee you'll not blow us up?"
+
+"Sure I will."
+
+"What, give the guarantee or blow us up?" asked Jack with a laugh.
+
+"I guess Josh knows he can trust me," said the well-shooter. "Now if
+you want to come along I've got room in the wagon, and the first well
+is only about a mile out. You'll have time to see it before they get
+the engine fixed."
+
+The boys at once decided they would go. It was a new experience, and,
+though they realized the danger, they felt comparatively safe with
+Mr. Baker.
+
+"I'll bring the wagon right around," said the shooter. "Wait here."
+
+In a few minutes he reappeared with a big two horse vehicle,
+containing two wide seats.
+
+"Get aboard!" he called, and the boys and Mr. Post scrambled up. The
+horses started off slowly, Mr. Baker driving, and they turned from
+the single street of the little village and emerged into a country
+road.
+
+Arriving at the well which was to be shot the boys saw a number of
+men. They had just finished using the borer, and had gone down a
+number of hundred feet without striking oil. It was, therefore,
+decided to "shoot it," that is, tin cylinders, containing in all
+about two hundred pounds of nitro-glycerine, were to be lowered into
+the hole, one on top of the other. Then a heavy cylindrical weight
+was to be dropped down on them. The concussion would set off the
+explosive.
+
+The powerful stuff, it was expected, would blow a hole down through
+the sand and rock, and release the imprisoned oil.
+
+Mr. Baker lost no time in getting to work. Carefully as though he was
+handling eggs, he lowered the tins of nitro-glycerine into the deep
+but narrow hole. The boys, as well as Mr. Post and the workmen, had
+moved a safe distance away. The final arrangements were made, and
+then all was in readiness for dropping the "go-devil," as it is
+termed.
+
+Mr. Baker gave a last look around to see that all were far enough
+back. Then, with a wave of his hand he stooped over the hole. The
+next instant he was running like a deer.
+
+"He's dropped it!" exclaimed Mr. Post. "Watch it now!"
+
+It seemed as if the running man would never get to a place of safety.
+The boys watched with their hearts in their mouths.
+
+Suddenly there sounded a subdued roar. Then came a curious trembling
+of the earth, a shaking of the solid ground. Two seconds later there
+spouted from the hole a column of black liquid that seemed to
+envelope the derrick which had not been taken down. At the same time
+there was a roaring, whistling noise.
+
+Suddenly Mr. Post, who was watching the spouting well, shouted:
+
+"Run boys! Run for your lives! Follow me!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+MR. POST'S ADVENTURE
+
+
+For an instant Jack Ranger and his two comrades did not realize what
+Mr. Post was saying. They could see no danger near them.
+
+"What's the matter?" asked Nat.
+
+"Don't stop to ask questions! Run! Run! Run!" yelled the miner.
+
+The boys needed no further urging, but set off at top speed after Mr.
+Post. He halted his run to allow the boys to catch up to him. Then,
+as he gave a glance backward, he yelled:
+
+"Too late! Duck!"
+
+The boys found themselves being pushed forward. They stumbled and
+fell, and it seemed as if some heavy weight toppled on top of them.
+Then came an explosion that sounded like a thirteen-inch gun being
+set off close to their ears.
+
+They were stunned by the shock and frightened half out of their wits
+by the unknown terror. An instant later it was as if the sky was
+raining gravel, stones and sand.
+
+"You can get up now," Jack heard Mr. Post saying. "That was about as
+narrow a squeak as I ever had, and I've been in some pretty tight
+places."
+
+"What's it all about?" asked John Smith, as he rose and began
+brushing the dirt from his hair.
+
+"That's what I want to know," put in Jack.
+
+"Snooping sand fleas! But I feel as if I had been digging a tunnel!"
+cried Nat.
+
+"Mighty lucky you didn't get blown down into one, or an oil hole,"
+said Mr. Post.
+
+"Anybody hurt?" asked Mr. Baker, running up at that moment. "My! I
+thought you'd all be killed!"
+
+"More good luck than good management that we weren't," replied the
+miner. "How could you do it, Jim?"
+
+"First time I ever was so careless," replied the well-shooter. "You
+can bet it'll never happen again."
+
+"What was it?" asked Nat.
+
+"Just an explosion of about twenty pounds of nitro-glycerine about as
+close to us as I ever care to have it," said Mr. Post.
+
+"Yes, and if it hadn't been for Josh, I don't know where you boys
+would be now," put in Mr. Baker. "He saved your lives, all right.
+That's what he did."
+
+"It wasn't anything," the miner interposed. "You see." he went on,
+"Jim sort of got careless and left one of his cans of nitro-glycerine
+lying on the ground. I didn't notice it, and I guess he didn't
+either, until he shot the well. Then, when I saw the shower of rock
+and stones, shooting up with the oil, and bearing right over toward
+where the can of juice lay, I figured out there was going to be
+trouble. That's why I yelled to you to run.
+
+"I knew if any stones fell and hit that can we had a first-class
+passage to kingdom come all bought and paid for, with through
+tickets. I could see a lot of stones hurling up in the air, and I
+knew, there wasn't anything to stop them from coming down. And the
+majority of them were headed right for that can of death and
+destruction."
+
+"That's all right, as far as it goes," said Mr. Baker, when the miner
+had ceased. "But he hasn't told you all. When Josh saw there was
+going to be an eruption, then and there, for one big stone was almost
+on top of the can, he just shoved you boys ahead of him, and then
+fell on you to shield you with his body. That's what I call being a
+hero."
+
+"Hi! You drop that!" exclaimed Mr. Post, making a grab for his old
+friend. "I didn't do any more than any one would have done. It was
+all your fault, anyhow, Jim Baker."
+
+"I know it was," admitted Mr. Baker, in contrite tones. "But that
+don't alter what I said, Josh."
+
+"Well if I ever hear you making any remarks about it, I'll inform the
+oil well authorities how careless you're getting and you'll lose your
+job," put in the miner. "Now I reckon you boys have seen enough for
+one day."
+
+"Well, I guess we have," said Jack. "Besides our train will leave
+pretty soon."
+
+By this time quite a number of oil workers had gathered around. There
+was considerable excitement, as it had been rumored a number were
+killed. As soon as matters quieted down men began attending to the
+oil well, which was spouting away at a lively rate, the thick oil
+running in many directions.
+
+The hole was piped, and then the stream of crude petroleum was turned
+into a channel whence it flowed into a reservoir. It had been a
+successful shooting.
+
+As they walked back to the wagon, having brushed the dirt from their
+clothes, the boys saw a big hole in the ground, not far from where
+Mr. Post had protected them from injury by sending them on the run
+out of danger.
+
+"What did that come from?" asked Nat.
+
+"Nitro-glycerine," replied Mr. Baker. "The juice is powerful stuff."
+
+The boys agreed with him.
+
+"Call in and see me any time you're in this direction," said the
+well-shooter, as he shook hands at parting with Mr. Post and the
+boys.
+
+"I will," replied the miner, "when you've gone into the grocery
+business or taken an agency for a life insurance company. Otherwise
+it's too risky."
+
+When the travelers got back to the station they found the engineer
+putting the finishing touches to the repairs he and the fireman had
+been making. The train was about to start.
+
+"Where have you been?" asked the conductor as the boys and the miner
+got aboard.
+
+"We've been having a race with death and it nearly won," replied Mr.
+Post, more solemnly than he had yet spoken.
+
+"What's the matter with him? Is he one of those religious fanatics?"
+asked the conductor, as the miner hurried into the car.
+
+"Not much," answered Jack. "We had as narrow a call as I ever want to
+experience." While the train was getting under way he told the
+ticket-taker what had happened.
+
+The next stop of importance which was reached early the next morning
+was at Cleveland, and there the boys learned they would have to wait
+seven hours for another train, as there had been some change in the
+schedules.
+
+"Couldn't be better," said Mr. Post, when he heard about it. "I've
+always wanted to see a big body of water and here's my chance. What
+do you boys say to a trip out on Lake Erie? The trolleys go there, I
+heard a brakeman say."
+
+The three chums, who had learned to like their new acquaintance more
+and more, thought it would be a fine trip to pass away the time.
+Accordingly after dinner, they boarded an electric car which took
+them in the direction of the lake.
+
+"Shall we go inside or ride on the platform?" asked the miner, as he
+paid the fares.
+
+"Let's stay outside," suggested Nat. "Tumbling trolley cars! But this
+is quite a town. Let's see all we can."
+
+So the four remained on the rear platform. It was not crowded, but,
+in a little while a number of men got on. The boys and Mr. Post were
+obliged to move back into the corner. Still they could see well from
+there.
+
+One of the men who was standing close to the miner was smoking a
+large cigar. He seemed particular of the ashes, and appeared to be
+trying for a record in the matter of the length of them. They
+extended from the burned part of the rolled tobacco more than an
+inch, and at every lurch of the car, the smoker was quite solicitous
+lest they be knocked off.
+
+At length the man standing in front of him jostled against him, as
+the car gave a sudden jerk. The ashes flew in a shower over Mr. Post,
+who was standing directly behind the smoker.
+
+"What's the matter with you? Don't you know how to ride on a car?"
+demanded the man with the cigar, of the one who had jostled him.
+
+"I beg your pardon, I'm sure," said the other humbly. "It was not
+intentional, I assure you."
+
+"You're a clumsy fellow," the other went on, in a loud voice. "Look
+here; you've made me knock ashes all over this gentleman," and he
+turned to Mr. Post.
+
+"That's all right," the miner said pleasantly, for he felt sorry for
+the other man. "He couldn't help it."
+
+"He ought to be made to help it," the smoker went on, as if very
+indignant. "People who don't know how to ride on cars ought to keep
+off. I shall write a letter to the papers about it. Allow me to dust
+the ashes off your vest."
+
+The man drew from his pocket a large white handkerchief, with which
+he began wiping the cigar ashes from Mr. Post's clothing.
+
+"Awfully careless of me, too," he murmured. "Hope you take no
+offense."
+
+"Not at all," the miner was saying. "It was all an accident, I'm
+sure. You--"
+
+Then, the miner's tone, which had been mild, suddenly changed. He
+made a grab for the hand of the young man who was dusting his vest
+off, and cried:
+
+"No, you don't, you scoundrel! Now I see what your game is! Let go my
+diamond pin or I'll shoot you!" and he made a motion toward his
+pocket, while the other passengers on the platform made hasty
+movements to get off.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+THE WILD STEER
+
+
+Mr. Post had the cigar smoker tightly by the wrist. The young man
+tried to break away, but as there were other persons between him and
+the car steps he was hemmed in. He made a rapid motion toward the
+passenger whom he had so berated for jostling him.
+
+"Ah, I thought so!" exclaimed the gray-haired man, who had remained a
+quiet spectator of the excitement. "It's about time I took a hand in
+the game."
+
+He made a rapid motion, intercepted the hand of the smoker which had
+been extended to the original cause of the disturbance, and grabbing
+something from it said:
+
+"There's your diamond, stranger. Take care of it until I put the
+nippers on these thieves!"
+
+The gray-haired man tried to edge his way around the crowd to get
+close to the two men who seemed to be the principal actors in the
+adventure. As he did so, the man who had been smoking--making a
+flying leap over the back platform railing, darted up the street. At
+the same time the man who had been accused of causing the cigar ashes
+to scatter over Mr. Post's vest, slipped from the steps and made a
+hurried run for the sidewalk.
+
+"After him, some one!" cried the gray-haired man. "I'll get the other
+chap. He's the main one. The other is only a confederate," and he was
+off in a trice.
+
+The car did not stop, though several men, understanding what it was
+all about, called the conductor.
+
+"Can't delay," replied the knight of the bell-rope. "If you want to
+see the fun, get off. Pickpockets are too common to stop the car
+for."
+
+"Well, I reckon I blocked his game that time," said Mr. Post, as he
+looked at the diamond which had lately adorned his shirt front. "I
+don't read the newspapers for nothing, and they'll find Josh Post is
+hard to beat."
+
+"What did he do to you?" asked some of the passengers.
+
+"Tried to frisk me out of my sparkler," replied the miner. "It's a
+new way of working an old trick, but I read about it in a New York
+paper last week."
+
+"How did he do it?" asked Jack.
+
+"There were two of 'em," Mr. Post went on. "That fellow had his
+cigar, with lots of ashes on it, already for me. Then the other
+fellow bunked into him, and he flicked the ashes on me. Of course he
+made a play to pretend it was the other fellow's fault, and he
+started to brush me off. But while he was doing it with his big
+handkerchief, he was taking out my diamond. I caught him just in
+time."
+
+"But who was the man who chased him, and gave you back your diamond?"
+asked Jack.
+
+"Detective, I reckon," replied the miner. "They're often riding on
+the cars on the lookout for just such things as that."
+
+"That's who he was," the conductor explained. "There's been a lot of
+pickpockets here lately, and the detectives are riding back and forth
+all day. Hope he catches that fellow."
+
+"Don't worry me any," said Mr. Post "I've got my diamond back," and
+he placed the sparkling stone in his pocket for safe keeping.
+
+Whether the detective ever caught the slick thief the boys never
+learned. They made the trip out to Lake Erie, and when they had
+looked at the big body of water and taken a short trip in a launch
+they returned to the station to find it was nearly the hour set for
+the departure of their train.
+
+"Things seem to be coming our way," remarked Mr. Post after they had
+been riding half an hour. "We've had lively times since we met, boys.
+But I'll have to leave you in Chicago."
+
+"Perhaps we'll see you again," said Nat. "Have you ever been out
+west?"
+
+"In my younger days," replied the miner. "I had a friend once named
+Travers--um--no--that wasn't exactly his name either. Travis--
+Trellis--Tennis--"
+
+"Tevis!" exclaimed Jack, struck by a sudden inspiration.
+
+"That's it!" cried Mr. Post. "I knew it was something that sounded
+like a grape vine. He and I used--"
+
+But what Mr. Tevis, or Trellis, used to do was not told then, for a
+second later there sounded a grinding crash and every one in the car
+was thrown from his seat while above the sound of hissing steam arose
+the shrill cries of several women.
+
+"Wreck!" yelled Mr. Post, struggling to his feet and starting up the
+aisle of the car, which was tilted at a steep angle. "We've hit
+something!"
+
+By this time, most of the other passengers, who had been thrown here
+and there, had extricated themselves from more or less undignified
+positions. There were anxious inquiries on every side, and a number
+of women fainted. For a while there was a lot of excitement, one lady
+going into hysterics at the sight of the bloody hand of a man, who
+was cut by a broken window.
+
+Mr. Post had hurried from the car. He came back in a little while,
+just as the boys, who were feeling themselves to discover if any
+bones were broken, had made up their minds to follow him and learn
+what the trouble was.
+
+"What is it?" half a dozen asked the miner.
+
+"We side-swiped a freight car," was the answer.
+
+"Side-swiped?" inquired John Smith, who was not so well up on
+Americanisms as the others.
+
+"Why a car projected over the end of a switch," explained Mr. Post.
+"Our train came along full tilt, and the engine hit it a glancin'
+blow, or a side-swipe, as the railroad men call it."
+
+"Much damage?" asked an elderly gentleman.
+
+"Well, they can't use that freight car without sendin' it to the
+hospital," replied Mr. Post, with a smile. "And our engine suffered
+minor bruises and contusions, as the papers say when a man is hurt. I
+reckon we'll be delayed a bit and it's somethin' I didn't count on."
+
+Mr. Post looked at his watch, and then consulted some papers he took
+from a big wallet.
+
+"I've got to be in Chicago at five o'clock to-morrow night," he said
+to the boys, "and at the rate we've been delayed I'm going to be
+late. It will mean a big loss to me, too, for I counted on putting a
+deal through with a friend of mine, Lemuel Liggins. He's to meet me
+in the stock yards. I don't suppose you boys are in any great rush,
+are you?"
+
+"Well," remarked Jack, "it doesn't make any great difference when we
+arrive, but we're supposed to be in Denville at a certain time. A
+little delay more or less will not hurt us, but I have something to
+do in Denver, and I may need more time than I'm likely to get now."
+
+"Then I'll tell you what I'm going to do," said Mr. Post, "I'm going
+to transfer to another line."
+
+"Then we'll do the same," said Jack.
+
+The Chicago train on the other line was on time, and the four
+passengers boarded it and were soon being pulled toward the great
+city of the Lakes with more comfort than they had experienced on the
+other train.
+
+"Ever see the Chicago stock yards?" asked Mr. Post, as they pulled
+out of the last station before reaching the big city. "It's a sight
+worth looking at," and he went on as the three chums admitted they
+had not. "I may not get a chance to show 'em to you, but if you want
+to you can get out there with me, and look at 'em on your own hook.
+Then you can go into the city."
+
+The lads decided this would be a good plan, and arranged to have
+their baggage go to a hotel where they were to stop over night. Mr.
+Post prevailed on the conductor to stop the train at a way station,
+close to the stock yards, and, when this was reached, he and the
+three boys alighted.
+
+It was about four o'clock in the afternoon, and Mr. Post found he was
+a little ahead of time. He hired a two-seated carriage in which he
+and the boys drove to where he was to meet Mr. Liggins.
+
+Soon after leaving the way station the boys were aware of a curious
+roaring sound that filled the air. It sounded like distant thunder.
+
+"What is it?" asked Jack.
+
+"It's the cattle in the stock yards," said Mr. Post. "There's
+thousands of 'em, and they keep that noise up all the while. Look
+ahead, and you can see some of the pens."
+
+The boys looked. In a net work of railroad tracks they saw fenced-in
+yards that seemed filled with a living brown mass. From them came
+impatient bellows and a shuffling, stamping sound, that told of the
+movement of innumerable cows and steers.
+
+"Drive over that way," said Mr. Post to the coachman. "That's where
+Lem said he'd meet me."
+
+They were now in the midst of the stock yards. The pens extended on
+every side, and the strong odor of the cattle, the noise and seeming
+confusion, the tooting of engine whistles, the puffing of
+locomotives, the movement of trains, and the wild notes of the
+imprisoned animals made a scene the boys never forgot.
+
+"There's my man!" exclaimed Mr. Post. "Hello, Lem! I'm right on
+time!"
+
+"So I see," remarked a tall lanky individual, who was standing near
+what seemed to be a small office in the midst of the stock yards. "A
+little ahead. It's only half past four."
+
+"Everything all right?" asked Mr. Post.
+
+"Sure thing. Who are your friends? Come along to see fair play?"
+
+"Some boys who are going out west," replied Mr. Post. "Now let's get
+down to business. Excuse me for awhile, boys. Make yourselves to
+home, and I'll be with you after a bit. Look around all you like."
+
+Mr. Post and his friend Lemuel Liggins retired into the small office.
+The boys alighted from the carriage, which drew up under a shed, and
+then the lads began to take in the various strange sights about them.
+
+"I didn't suppose there were so many cows and steers in all the
+world," said Jack.
+
+"Galloping grasshoppers! Neither did I," admitted Nat.
+
+"You've just begun to see the west," said John Smith. "It's a great
+place, and a big place."
+
+"Well, we're likely to see some of it in the next few weeks," said
+Nat. "I reckon Colorado is a good place to get a wide view from."
+
+"None better," admitted John. "It has a fine climate, and when we get
+there--"
+
+At that instant the attention of the boys was attracted by a loud
+shouting behind them. They turned, to see a crowd of men and boys
+running after a big brown animal.
+
+"One of the cows has got loose," said Nat.
+
+"Cows?" exclaimed John. "It's one of the wild steers, and it looks
+like a dangerous one. Better duck for cover."
+
+With a bellow the steer, which had broken from one of the pens, made
+straight for the boys. In close chase came the crowd.
+
+Suddenly the pursuing party throng parted, and, with a yell, a
+horseman, waving a lasso above his head, galloped after the beast. He
+was close to him when the steer, which was near the small office
+where Mr. Post and his friend were, turned sharply and darted off to
+the right. The horse man, at that instant had made a throw, but the
+rope went wild, and, a second later, trying to turn his horse quickly
+the steed stumbled and fell.
+
+The steer, with a mad bellow, turned around and started back for the
+crowd, that had halted. With lowered head, armed with long, sweeping,
+sharp horns, the angry animal leaped forward.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+THE OLD STOCKMAN
+
+
+"Someone will get hurt!" cried Jack.
+
+"Here, hold my coat and hat!" exclaimed John, as he thrust those
+articles of wearing apparel into Nat's hands.
+
+"What are you going to do?" asked Jack.
+
+"I'm going to rope that steer!" yelled the Indian lad.
+
+He ran to where the cattleman had fallen from his horse. The rider's
+leg was caught, and when he tried to stand, as John helped him up, it
+was seen that it was broken.
+
+"Is the horse a fast one?" John asked, pulling in the lariat, and
+coiling it.
+
+"He sure is," was the answer, while the man stretched out on the
+ground to wait for aid, which was on the way.
+
+A moment later John had mounted the horse and was off on a gallop
+after the steer, which was circling around in a wild endeavor to
+escape into the open. It's wild bellows were producing a panic among
+the other animals, that were dashing about in the pens, in imminent
+danger of knocking the sides down.
+
+As John, who seemed to be perfectly at home in the saddle, rode at
+the animal, it gave a snort and dashed off down a railroad track.
+Just ahead of it a freight train was coming, but the steer did not
+see it, as it dashed on, with lowered head.
+
+Straight down the track after the steer, raced John, urging the horse
+to top speed. Above his head swung the lasso, which the boy handled
+almost with the skill of a veteran.
+
+"Come back!" yelled Mr. Post. "Don't you see the train?"
+
+Evidently John did see, but he was not going to stop. He realized
+that unless he stopped the maddened steer it would dash ahead on into
+the locomotive. While it could not do the ponderous machine any harm,
+there was every chance of derailing it, if the wheels ground over the
+lifeless body, and a wreck might follow.
+
+"He's a plucky fellow!" exclaimed the cattleman, as some of his
+friends came to carry him to a place where his injured leg could be
+set.
+
+The pony John was riding entered into the spirit of the race. It was
+work for which he had been trained, and, though chasing after wild
+steers down a railroad track was not like doing it out on the plains,
+it was "all in the day's work." With nimble feet the pony leaped from
+tie to tie, on and on and on after the maddened brute.
+
+The engineer of the freight was blowing the whistle in frantic toots
+to warn the steer from the track, but the animal did not heed.
+
+"He'll never make it," exclaimed Jack.
+
+"Timbuctoo and turntables!" cried Nat. "He's a brave one. Never knew
+he could ride like that."
+
+John dug his heels into the pony's side to urge it to another burst
+of speed. Then, with a shout, he whirled the lasso in ever widening
+circles about his head. Suddenly he sent it whirling straight ahead.
+Like a thin snake the rope hissed forward, and then fell in coils
+about the neck of the steer. John had taken a turn or two about the
+pommel of the saddle, and, true to its training, the little pony
+settled back on its haunches.
+
+The next instant it seemed as if the steer had met a cyclone. It went
+down in a heap, a wild mixture of horns and flying hoofs. And, not a
+second too soon, for, as it rolled from the track, being fairly
+snatched from the rails by the taut-ness of the rope, the train came
+gliding up, though under reduced speed, and severed the lariat.
+
+Then John, with a motion of his wrist, guided the pony from the path
+to the train, which the engineer was doing his best to bring to a
+stop. The boy and steed easily got out of the way, and then, turning
+the pony, John rode to where he had left his companions. The steer,
+all the desire for fight gone, stood dejectedly beside the track, and
+a number of men, who had hurried up, took charge of it.
+
+[Illustration: IT SEEMED AS IF THE STEER HAD MET A CYCLONE-Page 154]
+
+"Say, that was the best bit of work I ever saw done!" commented Mr.
+Post, as he came from the office where he and Mr. Liggins had been
+talking. "I watched you through the window. Put it there, pardner,"
+and he extended his hand, which John grasped.
+
+"Where'd you learn to ride, young man?" asked Mr. Liggins, in
+business-like tones.
+
+"Some of my Indian relatives taught me," replied John modestly, as he
+dismounted. "I'm not very good at it though. Haven't had any
+practice."
+
+"You don't need it!" exclaimed Mr. Liggins.
+ "Say, young fellow, I'd like to hire you. I need you out here. We
+have accidents like this every day, only not so sensational, and if
+you can save a steer that way once in a while you'd more than earn
+your salary."
+
+"Much obliged," John said, "but I can't take your offer."
+
+"Why didn't you tell us you could rope a steer and handle a cow
+pony?" inquired Jack,
+
+"You never asked me," was John's reply. "You see I have some Indian
+traits in me, even if I am only a half-breed."
+
+"Well, you certainly can throw a rope," Jack admitted. "Wish I could
+do half as well."
+
+"Rollicking rattlesnakes! But I'm going to learn as soon as we get
+out on the ranch," put in Nat.
+
+"I guess you'll both have plenty of opportunity," John remarked.
+
+"Well, what are you boys going to do now?" asked Mr. Post. "I'm
+through with my business, and I've got to stay in town a few days,
+but I'll be so busy I'm afraid I'll not get much chance to see you.
+Besides you're going right on, aren't you?"
+
+"That's our plan," said Jack.
+
+"Well, I'll leave you then," went on the miner, "got to see another
+man in the yards. I may meet you again, some day, and I may not. This
+world's an uncertain place. Anyway, I'm glad I met you, and if you
+ever get into trouble and I can help you, why just wire me. My
+general address, for a year or two, will be Chicago, care of Lemuel
+Liggins. He'll see that you get into the city from here, all right,
+and will take good care of you. Now I'm off," and shaking hands with
+the boys and with Mr. Liggins, the miner hurried away down the maze
+of stock yards.
+
+"Come inside the office and rest a bit," invited Mr. Liggins. "You've
+got lots of time, and I'll drive you to town later."
+
+
+"Wait a minute!" cried Jack, darting after Mr. Post.
+
+He ran from the office and started down the maze of tracks in the
+direction the miner had taken. But Mr. Post was not to be seen. He
+had either met some acquaintance and gone into one of the numerous
+small offices and shacks that dotted the yards, or else was lost in
+the crowds. Jack soon came back, looking disappointed.
+
+"What did you want of him?" asked Nat.
+
+"I wanted to find out more about Orion Tevis," replied Jack. "You
+remember he spoke of him just before the accident when we collided
+with the freight, and I meant to ask him if he knew the man on whom
+the finding of my father may depend. But I forgot about it in all the
+excitement. Now it's too late."
+
+"Who did you want to inquire about?" asked Mr. Liggins, coming
+forward. "Excuse me, but I happened to hear you mention a strange
+sounding name."
+
+"Orion Tevis," said Jack. "Do you know anything about him, Mr.
+Liggins?"
+
+"Do I? Well I guess I do. Me and him didn't work as mining pardners
+for ten years for nothing. I reckon I do know Orion Tevis. So does
+Josh Post."
+
+"Where is he now?" asked Jack eagerly. "I must find him. He may know
+where my father is, who is in hiding because of the scheming of some
+wicked men."
+
+"Well, now you have got me," Mr. Liggins said. "I haven't seen Tevis
+for some years, not since he retired from active work. He speculates
+in cattle now and then, and I had a letter from him a few months
+ago."
+
+"Where is that letter now?" asked Jack, his voice trembling with
+eagerness.
+
+"Land live you! I guess I burned it up," replied Mr. Liggins. "I
+never save letters. Get too many of 'em. But it was from some place
+out in Colorado. A little country town, I reckon, or I'd have
+remembered the name."
+
+"Try to think of it," pleaded Jack. "A lot may depend on it. I may be
+able to get Mr. Tevis's address from the Capital Bank in Denver, but
+they may refuse to give it to me, or may have lost it."
+
+"Wish I could help you, son," said Mr. Liggins, sympathetically. "But
+I reckon I lost that letter. Hold on, though, maybe I can fix you up.
+You say his address is at the Capital Bank?"
+
+"That's what I understand."
+
+"Well, I wouldn't be surprised. Come to think of it now, he did write
+me he transacted all his business through them. More than that he
+sent me a sort of card to use in case I ever got out there, and
+wanted to see him. Said there was reasons why he didn't want every
+one to know where he was, so he instructed the bank to give his
+address to only those who showed a certain kind of card. I reckon I
+kept that card as a sort of curiosity."
+
+"I hope so," murmured Jack.
+
+The stockman began looking through a big wallet he pulled from his
+pocket. It was stuffed with papers and bills.
+
+"Here it is!" he exclaimed, as he extended a rather soiled bit of
+pasteboard. "Queer looking thing."
+
+Indeed it was. The card had a triangle drawn in the center. Inside of
+this was a circle, with a representation of an eye. In each of the
+angles were, respectively, a picture of a dagger, a revolver and a
+gun. On top appeared this:
+
+"_In Medio tutissimus ibis_"
+
+"Don't seem to mean anything as far as I've ever been able to make
+out," Mr. Liggins said. "Looks like a cross between a secret order
+card and a notice from the vigilance committee. And them words on the
+top I take to be some foreign language, but I never went to school
+enough to learn 'em."
+
+"They're Latin," said Jack, "and mean, literally, 'you will go most
+safely in the middle,' or, I suppose, 'the middle way is safest.'"
+
+"That's like Orion Tevis," commented the stockman. "He was always a
+cautious fellow, and rather queer here,"--he tapped his forehead.
+"But now I don't mind giving you that card. It may be no good, and it
+may help you. If it does I'll be glad of it. I owe you a good turn.
+That was one of my steers that broke away, and I'm glad it didn't
+cause a freight wreck."
+
+"I'll take good care of this," said Jack, as he put the card in his
+pocket, "and send it back to you."
+
+"Well, if you find Tevis, just do as he says about it," the cattleman
+answered. "Now I'll drive you back to the city."
+
+Jack was much pleased at getting the card. He felt it would help him
+in his strange quest after his father.
+
+"It will be additional evidence, for us" he said to John. "Mr. Tevis
+might think the rings were spurious."
+
+"Not much danger of that," the Indian answered. "Still, the card may
+come in handy."
+
+Mr. Liggins drove the boys to the hotel where they were to stay over
+night. They consulted the time-tables in the lobby, and learned that
+their train did not leave until the next afternoon.
+
+"Now for a good night's sleep," said Jack, as he and his chums were
+being taken up in the elevator to their rooms that night. At the
+sound of the lad's voice a tall, dark man, in the corner of the car
+started. Then, as he caught a glimpse of the boys' faces, he turned
+so his own was in the shadow.
+
+"Well, well, luck has certainly turned things my way," he murmured.
+"Here's where I get even for the trick they played me on the train."
+
+Little imagining they were menaced by one who felt himself their
+enemy, the three chums went to their rooms, which adjoined.
+
+"Very good," whispered the dark man, who had remained in the corridor
+as the boys walked it. "I think I will pay you a visit to-night."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+A THIEF IN THE NIGHT
+
+
+The boys were so tired from their day's adventures, and their travel
+that they did not need a bit of paregoric to make them sleep, as Nat
+expressed it, while he was undressing. They left the connecting doors
+open between their rooms, and, after putting their money and
+valuables under their pillows, soon fell into deep slumbers.
+
+It was about two o'clock in the morning when a dark figure stole
+along the corridor and came to a halt outside the door leading to
+Jack's room.
+
+"Doesn't make much difference which one I go in, I s'pose," was a
+whispered comment from the man, who was the same that had ridden up
+with the boys in the elevator.
+
+There was a slight clicking about the lock. Then something snapped.
+
+"No go that time," whispered the man. "Try another key."
+
+He selected one from among a bunch he held in his hand, and inserted
+it in the lock of the door leading to Jack's room. This time there
+was a different sort of click,
+
+"That's the time I did it," the intruder remarked softly. "Now to see
+if I can't get some of the money they made me lose on that other
+deal."
+
+Cautiously the man pushed open the door a few inches. It did not
+squeak, but, even when he had ascertained this, the thief did not
+enter at once. He paused, listening to the breathing of the three
+boys.
+
+"Sound asleep," he muttered. "No trouble. This is easy."
+
+On tiptoes he entered the room. The lights were all out but enough
+illumination came in from the street lights through the windows, to
+enable the intruder to see dimly. He noted that the connecting doors
+were open.
+
+"Easier than I thought," he muttered. "Now if they're like other
+travelers they have everything under their pillows. If they only knew
+that is the easiest place to get anything from! Pillows are so soft,
+and you can get your hand under one without waking up the slightest
+sleeper, if you go slow and careful."
+
+Up to the bedside of Jack the man stole. At every other step he
+stopped to listen. He moved as silently as a cat.
+
+"I fancy the laugh will be on the other side this trip," the man
+murmured. "I ought to get considerable from all three of them."
+
+By this time he had come so near to where Jack was sleeping that he
+could put out his hand and touch the bed. An instant later his
+fingers were gliding under the pillow. They grasped a leather
+pocketbook. Had it been light enough a smile of satisfaction could
+have been seen on the face of the thief in the night.
+
+"Number one," he remarked in a soft whisper.
+
+He moved into the next room, taking care not to stumble over a chair
+or stool. He easily secured Nat's valuables, and then ventured into
+John's apartment.
+
+"Ten minutes more and I'm through," the burglar thought.
+
+When he got to John's bedside, he listened for a few seconds. The
+Indian student could be heard breathing in his slumbers, but at the
+sound the man hesitated.
+
+"A slight sleeper," was his unspoken comment. "Liable to wake up on
+the slightest alarm. I've got to be careful."
+
+His trained observance, despite the evil purpose to which it was put,
+had at once told the intruder that John was a light and nervous
+slumberer. Nevertheless the thief decided to risk it. He moved his
+hand, inch by inch, under John's pillow. A shadow would have made no
+more noise. It took him nearly twice as long as it had to get the
+pocketbooks from Nat and Jack, but at length he was successful.
+Holding the three in his hand he made his way to the door whence he
+had entered.
+
+"I think I'll just take a look at what sort of a haul I made, before
+I leave here," the man said. "No use carting a lot of useless stuff
+away."
+
+There was a dim light burning in the hall, nearly opposite Jack's
+door. Half concealed by the portal the man paused just within the
+room and looked over the contents of the pocketbooks.
+
+"Plenty of bills," he observed.
+
+He took the money out and made it into one roll, and this he held in
+his hand. Rapidly he went through the other compartments of the
+wallets. He came across the queer card which Mr. Liggins had given
+Jack.
+
+"Might as well take that along," he said to himself. "No telling what
+it is, but it might come in handy. I might want to pretend I belonged
+to the order, for it looks like a lodge emblem. I'll stow that away."
+
+The thief laid the wallets and the money down on the floor, while he
+reached in a pocket to get a card case in which he carried his few
+valuables. He placed the odd bit of pasteboard inside this.
+
+"Now to toss the wallets aside and skip with the cash," he murmured,
+and suiting the action to his words he began to move softly into the
+corridor.
+
+It was a good thing that nature had endowed John with a nervous
+temperament, and had made him a light sleeper. For, at that instant,
+or maybe a little before, some peculiar action on the Indian's nerves
+conveyed a message to his brain.
+
+It was not a clear and definite sort of message, in fact it was
+rather confused--in the same shape as a dream. John seemed to be
+riding a big cow pony down a steep incline, after a big buffalo on
+whose back sat a dark, smooth-shaven man. The same man, John thought
+in his dream, he had seen in the elevator that evening.
+
+And while John was riding for dear life after the buffalo, he thought
+he saw the strange man turn back and go to where the three boys had
+left their coats on the grassy bank of Lake Rudmore. John fancied he
+gave up his pursuit of the buffalo to leap off and run to where the
+thief was stealing his own and his comrades' possessions.
+
+The shock of leaping from the back of a swiftly running pony, and
+rolling head over heals as a result, awoke John, or, rather, the
+peculiar action of his dream did. He sat up in bed with a jump, just
+in time to see the thief putting the money into his pocket, and, with
+the three wallets, steal out into the corridor.
+
+It must have been the continuance of the dream that made John act so
+quickly. He leaped out of bed, half asleep as he was, and, with a
+yell that sounded enough like an Indian warwhoop to startle his two
+companions, he made a dash for the man.
+
+Out of the room and down the dimly lighted hall dashed the Indian
+student. Before him fled the thief.
+
+"Stop!" yelled John.
+
+"What's the matter?" cried Jack, sitting up in bed and rubbing the
+sleep from his eyes. "Is the place on fire?"
+
+"What's the matter? Have we missed the train?" Nat demanded to know.
+
+"Thieves!" was all John replied.
+
+By this time several guests of the hotel had awakened and there were
+anxious inquiries as to what was going on. The thief sped down the
+long corridor, with John, clad only in his nightdress, after him. The
+fellow tossed the wallets down, but the flat way in which they fell
+told John the intruder had taken their most valuable contents from
+them.
+
+Well for the Indian that he was a fleet runner. Few there were who
+could have distanced him, and certainly the rascal who was out of
+training in athletic lines could not. A few more strides, and John
+grabbed the man by the coat.
+
+"Now I've got you!" the Indian shouted.
+
+A moment later the two went down in a heap, the man's legs having
+slipped from under him. But, even in the fall, John did not let go
+his hold. The man kept one hand in his pocket. In the flickering
+gaslight the Indian saw this, and rightly guessed that there the
+money was.
+
+Quick as a flash John slipped his hand in and found the man was
+grasping something tightly.
+
+"Let go!" the fellow growled.
+
+"Not much!" exclaimed John. "I'm after our money!"
+
+"I'll--I'll--cut you!" panted the thief.
+
+"Police! Murder! Fire!" yelled a woman outside of whose door the
+desperate struggle was now going on.
+
+With a great effort John loosened the hand that clenched the money.
+Then the Indian drew out the bills. The thief tried to grab them
+back. As he did so John tried to get up, having accomplished the main
+part of his purpose, that of saving his own and his chums' money.
+But, as he did so, the thief gave a roll, to get on top. This brought
+him to the edge of a flight of stairs, and, a second later the two
+were rolling down.
+
+Bump! Bump! Bump! they went until they reached a landing. John's head
+struck the baseboard, and, for a moment he was stunned. There was a
+rush of feet in the corridor above.
+
+"Hold him! We're coming!" was the cry.
+
+John heard dimly. Then a blackness seemed to come over him. The
+lights faded away. He just remembered thrusting his hand containing
+the bills into his pocket, and then he fainted away.
+
+The thief, with nimble feet, was half way down the second flight of
+stairs by now, for, finding the hold of his captor loosened, he made
+the best of his opportunity.
+
+"Have you got him, John?" yelled Jack.
+
+"Hold him until I come!" shouted Nat.
+
+They had both run out into the hallway in time to see John pursuing
+the thief. They reached the top of the stairs just as the fellow
+fled.
+
+The thief, as he ran down the stairs, cast up one look. Jack Ranger
+saw him, the light from a gas jet in the lower corridor shining full
+on the man's face.
+
+"Professor Punjab! Hemp Smith!" exclaimed Jack, as he recognized the
+fakir who called himself Marinello Booghoobally.
+
+"Did he get away?" asked Nat, coming up just then.
+
+"Yes, and I guess he's killed John," said Jack, his heart failing
+him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX
+
+A STRANGE SEANCE
+
+
+By this time the corridors, above and below were filled with excited
+men, all scantily attired. Nat and Jack ran to where John was lying
+on the landing, and lifted his head.
+
+"I'm all right," exclaimed the Indian, as he opened his eyes. "Got a
+bad one on the head, that's all. I can walk."
+
+He proceeded to demonstrate this by standing up and mounting the
+stairs.
+
+"Did he get our money?" asked Nat.
+
+In answer John showed the roll he still held tightly clenched in his
+hand.
+
+"Here are some pocketbooks," called a man from the upper hall.
+
+"Then we're all right, after all," spoke Jack. "Money and pocketbooks
+safe. How did it happen? How did you land on him, John?"
+
+"He was in our room," replied the Indian. "I woke up and saw him.
+Then I chased out, that's all."
+
+The man who had picked up the pocketbooks handed them to Jack. The
+boy saw his own on top, and opened it, as he had a number of
+souvenirs and keepsakes in it. As he glanced in he uttered a cry of
+surprise.
+
+"The card Mr. Liggins gave me to present to Mr. Tevis is gone!" he
+exclaimed. "Here! We must catch Professor Punjab! He has my card.
+Come on!"
+
+Jack was about to rush down the stairs but was stopped by several of
+the men.
+
+"You can't catch him," they said. "Besides, the police may have him
+by now. Go back and get dressed."
+
+The boys decided this was good advice, particularly as they were
+getting chilled, for the halls were draughty. They donned some
+clothes, and were all ready when several bluecoats and a number of
+detectives in plain clothes arrived.
+
+"Where'd they get in?" asked a big man, with a very black moustache.
+"Let's see what sort of a job it was."
+
+"Right in here," said the hotel manager, leading the way to where the
+boys roomed. "From all accounts this was the only place he broke
+into."
+
+"Didn't really lose anything, did you?" asked the black-moustached
+one of the boys.
+
+"He got a valuable card," said Jack. "I would not like to lose it."
+
+"What do you mean, a playing card; one you carried for luck?"
+
+"No, I don't carry such things for luck," replied Jack. "It had a
+message on it."
+
+He described the queer bit of pasteboard Mr, Liggins had given him.
+
+"Oh I see; it was a sort of charm," interposed the detective with the
+light moustache.
+
+"Well, we'll make a round of the pawnshops tomorrow. Maybe we'll
+locate it."
+
+"I don't believe so," said Jack, half to himself. "It's not a thing
+that would be pawned."
+
+The boy felt that Professor Punjab would be very likely to keep the
+card, thinking it might be some mysterious talisman, which could be
+used to advantage in his peculiar line of work. So Jack had little
+faith in what the detective said.
+
+There was nothing more for the police or detectives to do. No trace
+of the thief was to be found, and, after a general look around, the
+officers departed and the hotel settled down to normal quietness. The
+boys went back to bed, but it was some time before they fell asleep.
+
+Jack dozed uneasily, wondering how he was going to regain possession
+of the card which Professor Punjab had stolen.
+
+"You ought to be thankful it wasn't our money, which it would have
+been, only for John," said Nat next morning. "Penetrating peanuts!
+When I think of what might have happened I shudder," and he gave an
+imitation of a cold chill running down his back.
+
+"It's bad enough," said Jack. "Of course we need the money, but we
+could get more on a pinch. We can't get another card like that,
+though, and we may need it very much. At least I will."
+
+"Let's go to the police and make them find it," suggested Nat.
+
+"They'll never find it," put in John, who sat in a chair with his
+head bandaged. "We'll have to depend on ourselves."
+
+The robbery, and John's slight wound, necessitated a change in their
+plans. They wired to Mr. Kent, Nat's uncle, that they would be
+delayed. Then they arranged to stay several days in Chicago.
+
+The hotel proprietor insisted on sending a physician, to see the
+Indian. The medical man prescribed a rest, and, while John stayed in
+his room his chums paid several visits to the police. Jack impressed
+them with the value of the card, and the detectives really made
+efforts to find it, and to arrest the "professor," but without
+result.
+
+One evening, as Jack and Nat came back from a visit to police
+headquarters, they found John much excited.
+
+"I think I'm on the right track," he said.
+
+"How?" asked Jack.
+
+"Listen to this" John went on, holding up a newspaper, and he read:
+
+"Attention, all who suffer or are in distress. Professor Ali Baba,
+one of the descendants of the Forty Thieves, who has devoted his life
+to undoing the wrong they did, will give palm readings, star gazings,
+trance answers, locate the lost, and, by a method learned from an
+Indian Yogi, double your money. Readings one dollar up."
+
+"You're not going to be taken in by one of those foolish
+clairvoyants, are you?" asked Jack.
+
+"Not exactly," said John. "But if I am right I think this Professor
+Ali Baba is Hemp Smith, or Professor Punjab under another name."
+
+"What makes you think so?" inquired Nat. "Rip-snorting radiators! But
+if it should be!"
+
+"That last clause about doubling your money, by the Indian method
+leads me to believe it," said John. "That is how Punjab tried to rob
+Mr. Post. Now I'm going to try this and see what it amounts to."
+
+"But he'll know you as soon as he sees you," objected Nat.
+
+"Not the way I fix up," replied the Indian.
+
+The boys talked over the plan, and agreed it would do no harm for
+John to attend a seance of the professor, whose address was given in
+the advertisement.
+
+[Illutsration: Give me the card!--Page 177]
+
+John's best friend would hardly have known him as he sallied forth
+the next day. He wore the bandages on his head, which was cut by his
+fracas with the fake professor, and, in addition, he had tied one
+about his jaw, as though he had the toothache.
+
+He had no difficulty in finding the place. Outside the door was a
+sign reading:
+
+PROFESSOR ALI BABA. SCIENTIST.
+
+John was admitted by a rather slick individual, in a shining, greasy
+suit of black.
+
+"The professor is busy just now," he said. "He will see you soon.
+Meanwhile you had better give me a dollar, and state on which
+particular line you wish to consult him."
+
+John handed over a two dollar bill and said:
+
+"Tell him to make it extra strong. I have lost a valuable article."
+
+"I am sure he can find it for you," the sleek man said. "The
+professor has wonderful success."
+
+"Well he oughtn't to have much trouble finding this if he's the man I
+take him for," thought John. As yet he was all at sea. He wanted to
+get a glimpse of Professor Ali Baba.
+
+At last his turn came. Carefully keeping his face concealed, John was
+shown into a room gaudily decorated with tinsel and cheap hangings.
+
+"Who seeks the knowledge the stars alone possess?" asked a deep
+voice.
+
+Jack started. He recognized at once the tones of the recent Professor
+Punjab. An instant later he had a glimpse of the pretended
+astrologer's face and knew he could not be mistaken.
+
+"Draw near," said the fakir. "I know what thou seekest. It is that
+which thou hast lost, and it is more precious to thee than rubies."
+
+"In this particular instance it is," thought John, but he did not
+answer at once, as he was so excited he could hardly control his
+voice. He did not want the swindler to recognize him.
+
+"Tell me but the veriest outline of that which thou seekest and I
+will not only describe it, but tell you where you may find it, if the
+stars so will," Punjab went on.
+
+"It is very difficult," said John, speaking in a sort of whisper. He
+wanted to gain a little time, to think best how to proceed. He had
+been more successful than he dared to hope. His reasoning had been
+exactly right. Now he wanted to make sure of success.
+
+"No problem is too hard for those who read their answers in the
+stars," replied the fakir. "Describe what you have lost."
+
+"It is square," said John, slowly, and he drew a little closer to
+where the pretended astrologer sat on a divan in the midst of
+hangings, which let but little light into the room.
+
+"Yes, square."
+
+"And flat."
+
+"Yes. Now one more little detail. I begin to see a glimmering of it
+before me," and Professor Ali Baba pretended to go into a trance.
+
+"It is white with black markings on it," John went on. "In fact it is
+something you have right here in this house."
+
+"What's that?" fairly shouted the professor.
+
+"It's that card you stole from Jack Ranger!" went on John, coming
+close to the fakir and gripping him by the wrists. "The card you took
+from his pocketbook the night you broke into our rooms. I want it
+back! Give it up, you scoundrel, or I'll call in the police."
+
+"Let go!" yelled the professor.
+
+"Give me the card!" shouted the Indian, struggling to hold the man,
+who was trying to break away.
+
+"Help!" cried the professor.
+
+The curtains parted and the man who had answered John's summons at
+the door entered.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI
+
+FINDING ORION TEVIS
+
+
+"What's the matter?" exclaimed the slick individual.
+
+"He's trying to rob me!" shouted the fakir.
+
+"It's the other way around!" came from John. "I'm trying to get back
+something he stole from a friend of mine. Give up that card, you
+rascal, or I'll yell for the police!"
+
+At the same time the Indian youth, who was strong for his age, gave
+the wrists of Punjab such a wrench that the man cried out in pain.
+Whether it was this, or the knowledge that he could not afford to
+have a clash with the officers of the law John never decided, but the
+professor muttered:
+
+"I'll give you the card. Let go!"
+
+"Want any help?" asked the sleek and shiny individual.
+
+"Don't you interfere!" exclaimed John, "or I'll have you arrested
+too. Better keep out of this. The professor knows when he's beaten."
+
+"Let go of me," muttered the fakir.
+
+"Where's the card?" asked John.
+
+"It's in my pocket, but I can't get it while you hold my hands," the
+pretended astrologer said.
+
+The Indian youth released his grip, but kept close watch of the
+professor. The latter lifted up the gaudy robe and disclosed
+underneath ordinary street clothing. He reached into an inner pocket
+and brought out the card.
+
+"That's it!" cried John, grabbing it before the professor had a
+chance to play any more tricks. "That's what I want!"
+
+"Now you've got it, you'd better get out of my house," said Punjab,
+trying to assume his dignity which John had sadly ruffled.
+
+"Only too glad to," the Indian student said, and, carrying the
+precious card in his hand he hurried from the place, throwing aside
+his bandages as he did so.
+
+"I'll get even with you boys yet," he heard Marinello Booghoobally,
+_alias_ Hemp Smith, _alias_ Professor Punjab, _alias_ Ali Baba, call
+after him. But John was not worried over this and soon was back at
+the hotel where his companions anxiously waited him.
+
+"Any luck?" asked Jack.
+
+"The best," replied John, and he told them all that had happened from
+the time he entered Ali Baba's place until he secured the card,
+which, he had turned over to Jack as soon as he got in. The police
+were notified, but the fakir was too quick for them and escaped.
+
+"Now we'd better go straight for Denver," said Nat. "We're behind in
+our schedule now, and maybe my uncle will not wait for us."
+
+John and Jack thought this a good scheme, so, having settled their
+hotel bill, they were soon aboard a train again, and speeding
+westward. They made good time, in spite of a few delays by slight
+accidents, and arrived in Denver at night.
+
+"It's too late to go to the Capital Bank," said Jack. "Wish we'd have
+gotten in earlier. But we'll make inquiries about Orion Tevis the
+first thing in the morning."
+
+Long before the bank opened the boys had inquired their way to it
+from the hotel where they stopped. As soon as the doors were swung,
+to indicate that business might be transacted, Jack led the way into
+the marble-tiled corridor of the institution.
+
+"Who do you want to see?" asked a uniformed porter.
+
+"The president," said Jack boldly, thinking it best to begin at the
+top, and work down if necessary.
+
+"Want to deposit a million dollars I s'pose," the porter said with a
+sort of sneer. Evidently his breakfast had not agreed with him.
+
+"I came here to inquire for the address of Mr. Orion Tevis," replied
+Jack sharply, and in a loud tone, for he did not like to be made fun
+of. "If the president is not the proper person to ask will you kindly
+tell me who is?"
+
+"What's that?" asked a gray-haired man, peering out from a private
+office.
+
+"I am seeking the address of Mr. Orion Tevis," repeated Jack.
+
+"Step right in here," the elderly man said. "Johnson, you may go down
+into the basement and finish your work," he added to the porter who
+hurried away, probably feeling as though he had grown several inches
+shorter.
+
+"Now what is this about Mr. Tevis?" asked the man. "I am Mr. Snell,
+cashier of the bank."
+
+"I want to find Mr. Tevis, in order to ask him if he knows the
+whereabouts of a certain person in whom I am interested," said Jack.
+
+"Are you a private detective?" asked Mr. Snell, with a smile.
+
+"No sir, I'm Jack Ranger, from Denton, and these are friends of
+mine," and Jack mentioned their names.
+
+"Well, suppose I say we haven't Mr. Tevis's address," spoke Mr.
+Snell.
+
+"I was told it could be obtained here," Jack insisted.
+
+"If it could be, under certain conditions, are you able to fulfill
+those conditions?" asked the cashier.
+
+"If you mean this, yes," replied Jack, showing his queer ring.
+
+"Where did you get that?" asked Mr, Snell
+
+"It's a long story," Jack said. "The last time I got it was when I
+recovered it from a burglar. But we have another. Show him yours,
+John."
+
+The Indian student exhibited the odd gold emblem with the pine tree
+tracing on the moss agate. Mr. Snell looked at both circlets
+critically without saying anything. He glanced at the lettering
+inside.
+
+"I don't believe I am in a position to give you Mr. Tevis's address,"
+he said slowly.
+
+"What?" cried Jack. "After all our journey."
+
+"Show him the card," said John, in a whisper.
+
+Jack pulled from his pocket the curious bit of cardboard he had
+secured from Mr. Liggins. At the sight of it the cashier uttered an
+exclamation. He got up and closed the door leading to the bank
+corridor.
+
+"That settles it!" he exclaimed. "Your credentials are all right.
+Wait a minute."
+
+He pressed a button on his desk. A short, stockily built man entered
+the room.
+
+"Perkins, you may feed the red cow," the cashier said gravely.
+
+"Yes sir," replied Perkins, as calmly as though he had been told to
+hand over the city directory.
+
+"And whisper to her that the goats have come," the cashier went on,
+at which Perkins turned and left the room.
+
+"Now boys I am ready for you," said Mr. Snell, and Jack related as
+much of the matter as he thought might have a bearing on his search.
+
+"I can give you Mr. Tevis's address," the cashier went on. "You must
+excuse my caution, but, as you doubtless know, there have been
+strange doings in connection with that land deal. So you are Jack
+Ranger?"
+
+"That's me. But now where can I find Orion Tevis and learn where my
+father is?"
+
+"I'm afraid you're going to have trouble," Mr. Snell went on. "All we
+know is that Mr. Tevis lives somewhere on a wild tract of land among
+the mountains about one hundred miles from Fillmore."
+
+"Fillmore, that's where we have to go to get to Denville," said Nat
+
+"So it is," Jack murmured.
+
+"You see Mr. Tevis is a rather peculiar individual and surrounds
+himself with many safeguards," Mr. Snell went on. "We were only to
+give his address to those who brought the rings and the card. I was
+at first afraid you were impostors, as there have been several such.
+We are also required to send Mr. Tevis word as soon as any one comes
+here, bearing the proper emblems, and seeking him. You heard what I
+said to that man a while ago. It was a code message to be transmitted
+to Mr. Tevis."
+
+"But if you know where to send him a message, why can't you tell us
+how to reach him?" asked Jack.
+
+"I can tell you as much as we ourselves know. We send the messages to
+a certain man living in Fillmore. He, in turn, rides off into the
+mountains and, from what I have heard, leaves the letter in the cleft
+of an old tree, of which he alone knows the location. Then he comes
+away. In time Mr. Tevis, or some of his men, come and get the letter.
+If he wishes to send an answer he leaves it in the tree. If not that
+ends the matter. If he wishes to remain hidden he does so. He seldom
+comes to town, and has only been at this bank once in a number of
+years. Now, don't you think you have a pretty hard task ahead of
+you?"
+
+"Will you tell me how to find this man in Fillmore, who knows how to
+take that letter?" asked Jack.
+
+"Good!" exclaimed Mr. Snell. "That's the way to talk. I sized you up
+for a plucky lad as soon as I saw you. Now if you will take pencil
+and paper, I'll give you directions for reaching Enos Hardy, who may
+succeed in getting a message to Mr. Tevis for you."
+
+Jack jotted down what Mr. Snell told him, and, at his suggestion, the
+other two boys made copies, in case of accident. Then, having cashed
+some letters of credit which they brought with them, the boys went
+back to their hotel.
+
+"What are you going to do, Jack?" asked Nat.
+
+"I'm going to find Orion Tevis," was the reply. "I think I had better
+do it before I go on to your uncle's ranch, Nat. What do you say?"
+
+"Slippery snapping turtles!" exclaimed Nat. "If I was you I'd do the
+same thing. You ought to make that hundred miles and back in a week,
+and we can go to uncle's ranch then. We'll go with you; eh, John?"
+
+"Sure," replied the Indian.
+
+"Let's hurry on to Fillmore," Nat went on. "If my uncle is there
+waiting for us, we can tell him all about it. If not we can send him
+a letter, telling him where we are going, and letting him know about
+what time we'll be back. It's only twenty miles from Fillmore to
+Denville, near where his ranch is."
+
+This plan was voted a good one, and as soon as the boys could catch a
+train out of Denver they were speeding toward what was to be the last
+railroad station of their long western trip.
+
+They were two days reaching it, owing to the poor connections,
+because they were now traveling on branch line railroads, but they
+got into the little mining town one evening at dusk. So explicit were
+the directions Mr. Snell had given them that they had no difficulty
+in reaching the Eagle Hotel, where the cashier had advised them to
+put up. They registered, and, in accordance with their directions,
+left a note with the hotel clerk for Enos Hardy.
+
+"He'll be in some time to-night," the clerk said. "He comes here
+every evening."
+
+It was about nine o'clock that night when a message came to the boys'
+room that Mr. Hardy would see them in the sitting room of the hotel.
+Jack went down alone, and found waiting for him a grizzly, heavily-
+bearded man, rather stoop-shouldered. He glanced from under his
+shaggy eyebrows at Jack.
+
+"You left a message for Enos Hardy?" the man asked.
+
+"I did, in reference to Orion Tevis," admitted Jack.
+
+"Have you the emblems?"
+
+Jack showed the rings and card.
+
+"Um!" grunted the man. "What do you want?"
+
+"I want to see Orion Tevis, and ask him about my father."
+
+"It will take me three days to bring you an answer," Mr. Hardy went
+on. "Will you wait here until then?"
+
+Jack bowed his assent.
+
+"You must trust the rings and card to me," Mr. Hardy went on. "Oh,
+they will be safe," he added, as he saw Jack give a start of
+surprise. "You can ask any one in Fillmore about me."
+
+Without a word Jack handed over the two rings and the bit of
+pasteboard.
+
+"This is Tuesday," the strange messenger went on. "I will be back
+here with an answer Friday night."
+
+"Then I can start for Mr. Tevis's place the next day," spoke Jack.
+
+"If the answer is favorable," Mr. Hardy said, as he left the room.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII
+
+JACK HEARS OF HIS FATHER
+
+
+For a few moments Jack stood looking at the door that had closed on
+Mr. Hardy. The man seemed a link between the boy and his long-lost
+father, and Jack felt as if he would not like to allow Mr. Tevis's
+confidant to be out of his sight. But he reflected if he was to see
+the man who held his father's secret he must follow out the line laid
+down.
+
+He went to where he had left Nat and John, and told them what had
+happened. Jack announced anticipation of a favorable reply from Mr.
+Tevis, who, he said, would, no doubt, keep his promise made years ago
+to those to whom he had presented the rings.
+
+"Then we'll get ready to go with you," announced Nat. "Hopping
+halibut! I forgot to write to my uncle. I heard from the hotel clerk
+he had waited here for us two days, and then went back, leaving word
+we could come on to the ranch, or wait for him. He'll be back inside
+of a week."
+
+"That fits into our plans," Jack said. "Write and tell him we arrived
+and will be ready to go with him a week from to-day, I think I can
+learn what I want in that time."
+
+Accordingly Nat got a letter ready, and intrusted it to the hotel
+clerk, who promised to send it to Double B ranch at the first
+opportunity. Mr. Kent's ranch was known by the device of two capital
+B's, one placed backwards in front of the other, and this brand
+appeared on all his cattle. His uncle's place, Nat learned, was on a
+big plateau in the midst of a mountain range. Men from it frequently
+rode into Fillmore, and it was by one of them the hotel clerk
+proposed sending the boy's letter to Mr. Kent.
+
+This done, the three chums sat in their rooms discussing the strange
+things that had come to pass since they had left Washington Hall.
+
+"Seems as if it was several months, instead of a couple of weeks,"
+said John. "I'll be glad when we get out where it's good and wild."
+
+The boys found much to occupy their time in the hustling city of
+Denver. They went about viewing the sights, but all the while Jack
+was impatiently awaiting the return of Mr. Hardy.
+
+"I wonder if the days are any longer here than back east," he
+remarked.
+
+"It's you," replied Nat. "Stop thinking about it, and Friday night
+will come sooner."
+
+"Can't help it," Jack went on, with a deep sigh.
+
+Friday night came at last, though it was nearly ten o'clock before
+Jack, who was anxiously waiting in his room, received a message that
+some one wanted to see him. He went down and was met by Mr. Hardy.
+The man showed the dust and grime of travel.
+
+"Well?" asked Jack.
+
+"When do you want to start?" asked Mr. Hardy.
+
+"To-morrow morning," was Jack's quick reply, and a load was lifted
+from his mind.
+
+"Then I'll have a horse for you here at nine o'clock," Mr. Tevis's
+friend went on, as he handed back the rings and the card.
+
+"Can't John and Nat go along?" inquired Jack, for he had mentioned
+his friends to Mr. Hardy.
+
+"I suppose so," was the answer. "It will take longer if so many of us
+go, but I have no orders to keep your friends back if they want to
+accompany us. It's a wild trip, and has to be made on horseback."
+
+"They'll want to go. None of us is a good rider, but we'll do our
+best"
+
+"Very well, I'll have three horses."
+
+"Do you think Mr. Tevis will have some news of my father?" asked
+Jack, a note of anxiety coming into his voice.
+
+"I shouldn't be surprised," was the cautious answer. "Mr. Tevis can
+generally be depended on to produce the goods. Now I'll leave you, as
+I have lots of work to do before morning. I'm glad I succeeded in
+arranging it for you,"
+
+"So am I," exclaimed Jack, as he held out his hand and met that of
+Mr. Hardy's in hearty clasp.
+
+"Can you two stand a hundred mile ride on horseback?" asked Jack of
+his two chums, when he was back in his room.
+
+"Two if necessary," replied John.
+
+"And two it will have to be," Jack went on. "I forgot it's a hundred
+each way. Well, we're in for it," and he explained what Mr. Hardy had
+told him.
+
+The horses which Mr. Tevis's messenger brought around the next
+morning proved to be steady-going animals. Their backs were broad and
+they carried easy-riding saddles. Under the direction of the guide
+the boys packed up some blankets and enough "grub," to last several
+days, since they could not expect to make as good time as had Mr.
+Hardy. Leaving their trunks and grips at the hotel the boys, with
+their new-found friend in the lead, started for Mr. Tevis's mountain
+home.
+
+"He's a strange man," said Mr, Hardy, as he rode along by Jack's side
+a little later. "He had so much trouble with a band of bad men once
+that he made up his mind he would have no more. He knows the gang is
+still trying to get the best of him, and that's why he takes so many
+precautions. It is the same ugly crowd that made your father an
+exile, I understand."
+
+"But his exile is almost up," said Jack earnestly. "The eleven years
+will pass this summer, and he can come back to us."
+
+"If you can only find him to get word to him."
+
+"Do you think I can't find him?"
+
+"Well, the mountains are a wild place. It's hard enough to keep track
+of men who have no motive for hiding, let alone those who believe
+every effort to locate them is made with an idea of doing them some
+harm."
+
+"If I can only get word to him I know my father will wander no
+longer. I need him and he needs me."
+
+Half a day's riding brought them to a wild part of the country. The
+trail was a narrow one. Now it led along a high range of foothills,
+skirting some deep ravine. Again it was down in a valley, along the
+course of some mountain stream that was now almost dry.
+
+The bracing atmosphere, though it was so rarefied that the boys, at
+first, found a little difficulty in breathing, made objects seem
+strangely near. Several times Jack and his companions saw a distant
+landmark, and wondered why they were so long in reaching it. Mr.
+Hardy laughed at their astonishment as he explained the reason for
+the seeming nearness.
+
+They had dinner on the side of a mountain which they had begun to
+ascend shortly before noon. Mr. Hardy proved himself an old
+campaigner. He had a fire made, and bacon frying before the boys had
+the stiffness from their legs, caused by their ride. Then, with bread
+and coffee, they made a better meal than they had partaken of in many
+a hotel.
+
+That night they slept in a lonely mountain cabin, the owner of which
+Mr. Hardy knew. They pressed on the next morning, their pace being
+slow because Nat found he could not ride as well as he had hoped.
+
+"Galloping gooseberries!" he exclaimed. "I feel as if all my bones
+were loose. You didn't see any of 'em scattered back along the trail,
+did you, Jack?"
+
+"You'll get over it," said Mr. Hardy. "Got to learn to ride if you're
+going on a ranch. No one walks there."
+
+They had to sleep in the open the next night, but Mr. Hardy built a
+big fire, and, well wrapped in their blankets, the boys were not
+uncomfortable, even though it was cold on the mountain from the time
+the sun went down.
+
+It was cold, too, the next morning, as they crawled from their warm
+coverings, but when their guide had thrown a lot of wood on the
+glowing embers, causing them to spring into a fine blaze, the boys
+got up and helped prepare breakfast.
+
+"We're almost there," said Mr. Hardy, as they mounted their horses to
+resume their trip.
+
+They rode until shortly before noon, when Mr. Hardy suddenly pulled
+his horse up and said:
+
+"Here's as far as we can go, boys, until we get word from Mr. Tevis.
+There's the tree where I leave the messages." He pointed to a big oak
+that had been struck by lightning, and split partly down the immense
+trunk. One blackened branch stuck up. It had a cleft in it, in which
+a letter could be placed and seen from afar.
+
+"Now I'll just leave a note there, and we'll have to be guided by
+what happens," Mr. Hardy went on.
+
+He wrote something on a piece of paper, and asked Jack for the rings
+and the card symbol. These, with the message he had written, he
+placed in an envelope. The letter was enclosed in a bit of oiled
+silk, and the whole deposited in the cleft of the limb.
+
+"It might rain before it is taken away," he explained. "You can never
+tell when Mr. Tevis or his messengers come. He can see that letter
+from his house, by using a telescope, but he may not send for it. It
+all depends."
+
+"How will you know if he does?" asked Jack.
+
+"I will come back here to-morrow at noon," replied the guide. "If
+there is an answer, there will be a little white flag where the
+letter was, Then I will know what to do."
+
+There was nothing to do but wait. Mr. Hardy explained that it was
+necessary that they move back down the mountain, a mile or more away
+from the signal tree. To Jack and his chums this seemed a lot of
+needless precaution, but they were in no position to do anything
+different.
+
+Jack passed the night in uneasy slumber, for he could not help
+thinking of what the morrow might bring and what effect it might have
+on his search for his father. But all things have an end, and morning
+finally came. After breakfast Mr. Hardy looked well to the saddle
+girths, as he said, if they were to go further on their journey, they
+would have to proceed over a rougher road than any they had yet
+traversed.
+
+They started for the blighted oak so as to reach there about noon.
+How anxiously did Jack peer ahead for a sight of the lightning-
+blasted tree, in order to catch the first glimpse of the white flag
+he hoped to see! He was so impatient that Mr. Hardy had to caution
+him not to ride too fast. But in spite of this the boy kept pressing
+his horse forward. As the little cavalcade turned around a bend in
+the trail Jack cried out:
+
+"I see it! There's the white flag! Now we can go on and hear the news
+of my father!"
+
+"Don't be too sure," muttered Mr. Hardy. "It may be a message saying
+there is no news," but he did not tell Jack this.
+
+The sun was just crossing the zenith when Mr. Hardy took from the
+cleft of the branch a small packet wrapped in oiled silk, similar to
+the one he had left. Quickly tearing off the wrapping the guide
+disclosed a piece of white paper. On It was but one word:
+
+"Come."
+
+"Hurrah!" yelled Jack, throwing his hat into the air, and nearly
+losing his balance recovering it.
+
+"Walloping washtubs!" yelled Nat.
+
+"Let's hurry on," spoke John Smith, more quietly. But he, too, felt
+the excitement of the moment, only he was used to repressing his
+feelings.
+
+ "Prepare for a hard ride," said Mr. Hardy. "We must make Mr. Tevis's
+place by night, as it is dangerous to camp in the open around here.
+Too many wild beasts."
+
+From the blasted oak the trail led in winding paths up the mountain.
+It was indeed a hard one. Great boulders blocked the path, and there
+were places where rains had washed out big gullies. But the horses
+seemed used to such traveling, for they scrambled along like goats on
+a rocky cliff.
+
+It was just getting dusk when, as they topped a considerable rise,
+Mr. Hardy pointed ahead to where a light glimmered on the side of the
+mountain, and said:
+
+"There is Mr. Tevis's house."
+
+Jack's heart gave a mighty thump. At last he was at one of the
+important stages of his long trip. As the riders advanced there came,
+from out of the fast gathering darkness a command:
+
+"Halt! Who comes?"
+
+"Friends!" exclaimed Mr. Hardy.
+
+"What word have you?"
+
+"Pine tree and moss agate," was the answer.
+
+"You may enter," the unseen speaker added.
+
+There was the sound of a heavy gate swinging open, and following
+their guide the boys urged their horses ahead. They found themselves
+on a well-made road, which led to a fairly large house.
+
+"Dismount," said Mr. Hardy, as he brought his steed to a halt in
+front of a large piazza that surrounded the residence. "We are here
+at last."
+
+As he spoke the door opened, sending out a stream of brilliant light.
+In the center of the radiance stood a tall man, looking out.
+
+"Good evening, Mr. Tevis," spoke Mr. Hardy.
+
+"Ah, Enos, so you have arrived. And did you bring the boys with you?"
+
+"All three, sir."
+
+"Very good. Come in. Supper is ready."
+
+Jack sprang from his horse and, with a bound was on the porch beside
+the man he had come so far to see.
+
+"Mr. Tevis!" he exclaimed, "Have you any news of my father? Is he
+alive? Can you tell me where to find him?"
+
+"Yes, to all three questions, Jack Ranger," said Mr. Tevis, heartily,
+and Jack felt his heart thumping against his ribs as though it would
+leap out.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII
+
+ON THE RANCH
+
+
+Some men came up and led the horses of the riders to a stable in the
+rear. Mr. Tevis showed the way into his house. It was a big log
+cabin, but was furnished with many comforts. On the floors were great
+bear rugs, while skulls and horns of other animals decorated the
+walls. The light came from two big kerosene hanging lamps.
+
+"Welcome to Cabin Lodge," said Mr. Tevis.
+
+"I hope you are all hungry, as we have a fine supper waiting for
+you."
+
+"That's what I want," said Mr. Hardy. "We haven't stopped much for
+grub since we started."
+
+"I'd like to hear more about my father, before I eat," said Jack.
+
+"I realize your impatience," Mr. Tevis replied, with a smile, "and
+I'll endeavor to relieve your mind. I will tell you what I know while
+the others are getting ready for the meal."
+
+Then Mr. Tevis told briefly the history of Robert Ranger, or Roberts,
+as he best knew him, with the main facts of which Jack was familiar.
+He told of his acquaintance with him and John Smith's father, and how
+the bad men had tried unsuccessfully to get control of the timber
+claim. Jack found him a peculiar man indeed, but seemingly good
+hearted.
+
+"But what you want to know," Mr. Tevis went on, "is how to find your
+father now."
+
+Jack nodded eagerly.
+
+"Of course you know I have not seen him in a long time, as he did not
+think it wise to come here, fearing the gang would capture him and
+get him into court. But I have heard from him, not later than three
+months ago."
+
+"Where is he?" asked Jack, hardly able to sit still.
+
+"While I can't say exactly," Mr. Tevis went on, "I know he is
+somewhere in a small range of mountains called Golden Glow. He has a
+small cabin there, and manages to make a living by doing some mining.
+He has one companion, whom he can trust, and who goes back to
+civilization once in a while to get food and supplies. Your father
+will not trust himself in sight of a town. In fact it is almost as
+hard to communicate with him as it is with me."
+
+"Where are the Golden Glow mountains?" asked Jack.
+
+"The nearest town is Denville," was the answer.
+
+"Denville!" exclaimed Jack.
+
+"Yes, what is there strange in that?"
+
+"Why, we are going to Denville," Jack replied, "That's where Nat's
+uncle's ranch is."
+
+"Yes, but the beginning of the Golden Glow mountain range is about a
+hundred miles from there," Mr. Tevis added.
+
+"What's a hundred miles when I'm going to find my father and take him
+back home with me?" asked Jack. "I can travel that."
+
+"You've got pluck," spoke Mr. Tevis. "I wish you luck, my boy."
+
+Then he told all the particulars he knew of Mr. Roberts' whereabouts,
+how the exile had often written to him of his lonely life, and how
+much he would like to see his son and his sisters again.
+
+"We have both been hounded by that gang of land sharps," concluded
+Mr. Tevis, with a deep sigh. "I have found means of evading them by
+living in this wild place, and adopting all sorts of precautions in
+admitting visitors. That is why I was so careful on your account. I
+could not tell who might be trying to play a trick on me. But I
+devised that card for a few of my friends. Lucky you met Lem Liggins,
+or I doubt if even the sight of the two rings would have convinced
+me. But I felt reasonably certain no one could have both the card and
+the rings. Even at that you saw how cautious I am, by the details Mr.
+Hardy had to go through."
+
+"How would you advise me to reach my father, and let him know it is
+safe to return?" asked Jack.
+
+Mr. Tevis paused a moment. He remained in deep thought for some time.
+Then he spoke.
+
+"In one of his letters," he said, "your father told me if I ever
+wanted to see him, to adopt this plan. There is in the Golden Glow
+range one peak, higher than all the others. From a certain place in
+it, a place marked by a big stone on which is carved a cross, a tall
+pine tree, bare of branches, can be seen. By keeping down the side of
+the slope, and in direct line with the pine you will come to a little
+valley. At the lower end of this is your father's cabin. Only be
+careful how you approach it. In this country men sometimes shoot
+first and inquire afterward."
+
+"How will I know the high peak when I see it?" asked Jack.
+
+"You can hardly mistake it," Mr. Tevis remarked. "But you can be sure
+of it, because, just at sunset, you will see it envelop in a golden
+glow. That is what gives the name to the mountain range. It seems
+there is a mass of quartz on top of the peak, and the sun, reflecting
+from it just before it sets, shines as if from burnished gold. I
+think you will have no trouble in finding the peak, and, though it
+may be hard, I hope you will find your father. Here, let me give you
+this. It may help you."
+
+He took from his watch chain, a curious little charm. It was in the
+shape of a golden lizard, with ruby eyes.
+
+"Your father gave that to me many years ago," said the timber owner.
+"If worst comes to worst, and you can't get to him, but can send him a
+message, send that. He will know it comes from me, even if he doubts
+the rings. It has a secret mark. Now let's go to supper."
+
+There were many thoughts in Jack's mind and many feelings in his
+heart as he ate at the table at which they all gathered. He did not
+join in the talk and laughter that went around. Mr. Hardy told Mr.
+Tevis of the trip he and the three boys had made, and Nat and John
+added their share to the general conversation.
+
+"What makes you so quiet?" asked Nat of his chum.
+
+"I'm thinking of what's ahead of me," Jack replied.
+
+Mr. Tevis wanted his guests to remain several days with him, but the
+boys were anxious to get on to the ranch, and decided they would
+start back for Fillmore the next day. That night Mr. Tevis returned
+to John and Jack their rings, but he kept the peculiar card.
+
+"I will send it back to Lem," he said. "He might want to come and see
+me some time. I still have to be on my guard. As for you boys, keep a
+constant watch. There is no telling when those men may resume their
+tricks. They know the time set by law is almost up, and they are
+likely to redouble their efforts. Be on your guard, Jack."
+
+"I will," Jack answered, and then he and his chums bade their host
+good-bye. Mounting their horses, and led by Mr. Hardy, they again
+took up the trail, and the heavy log gate was shut after them, as
+they left the stockade inside of which Cabin Lodge was built.
+
+When the boys and their guide went back to the hotel in Fillmore, the
+return trip having been made in better time than the outgoing, there
+was a letter from Mr. Kent to Nat. The boy's uncle said he was so
+busy he had no time to come for them, but, he added, he would send
+one of his men with three horses which the boys could ride out to the
+ranch. Their trunks and baggage had been called for by one of the
+Double B ranchmen while they were on their way to Mr. Tevis's, so the
+boys had nothing to worry about but themselves.
+
+They had arrived at the hotel about noon, and having eaten dinner,
+sat down to await the arrival of the man who was to escort them. He
+had been in town for two days, the hotel clerk said, but, at that
+moment, had gone to see some friends.
+
+"I'll send him up to your room when he comes in," said the clerk, and
+the boys went upstairs to pack a few little articles that had not
+gone on with their trunks and valises.
+
+It was while they were in the midst of that that a knock sounded on
+their door.
+
+"Come in," cried Jack, all three being then in his apartment.
+
+A tall, slightly built man, with a little light moustache, blue eyes,
+dressed in regulation cowboy costume, entered, holding his broad-
+brimmed hat in his hand.
+
+"I'm lookin' for Nat Anderson an' his chums, Jack Ranger an' John
+Smith," he announced.
+
+"Right in here," called out Nat.
+
+"I'm Rattlesnake Jim," announced the stranger, "and I come from
+Double B ranch to show you the way."
+
+The boys were only too anxious to get started. They paid their hotel
+bill, and when they got outside found there were three fine ponies
+waiting for them.
+
+"Mount!" called Rattlesnake Jim.
+
+The lads were very glad of the practice they had in riding with Mr.
+Hardy, for they felt their new guide was watching them closely. If he
+had any fault to find he did not mention it.
+
+It was a pleasant afternoon, and, once they were out in the open
+country, after ascending a slight rise, the boys let their animals
+out. They found them plenty speedy enough.
+
+"Not so bad for tenderfeet," muttered Rattlesnake Jim, under his
+breath.
+
+The road led along a long level stretch, the big plateau extending
+for miles ahead of them.
+
+"About what time will we get to my uncle's place?" asked Nat
+
+"Grub time, I reckon," said Rattlesnake Jim, who, as the boys
+afterward learned, had gained his name from the hatred he bore to the
+reptiles.
+
+"Very busy now?" went on Nat.
+
+"Passably so. Been rustlin' after horse thieves for th' last few
+nights," replied Jim coolly.
+
+Before the boys could get over this rather startling remark, Jack's
+horse suddenly shied. The lad was nearly thrown off, and, as he
+recovered his balance, and looked to see what had scared the animal,
+he saw, in the shadow of a big stone at the side of the road, an old
+man crawling along.
+
+"Hold on thar, stranger!" called Rattlesnake Jim, drawing his
+revolver and covering the man.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV
+
+THE OLD MAN
+
+
+"Don't shoot!" the old man begged, trying to stand up, but toppling
+in a heap. "Don't shoot! I haven't done anything!"
+
+"We'll see about that," went on Jim, as he dismounted. "What are you
+sneaking around like that for, hiding under a rock? If it had been a
+little darker we wouldn't have seen you. Who are you?"
+
+"I don't know's it any of your affair," replied the stranger
+sullenly, as he sat down on the ground.
+
+"Shot, eh," remarked Jim, as he noticed that the man's left foot was
+covered with blood. "Now you'd better tell me all about it, before I
+make trouble for you."
+
+"It was an accident," replied the man. "I was cleaning my gun. I
+forgot I had a shell in it, and it went off and hit my foot. It was
+back there, and I thought I'd crawl along until I got to some place I
+could get help."
+
+"Likely story," said Jim with a sneer. "That don't go with me,
+stranger. You stay here and I'll send some of the men to have a look
+at you."
+
+"Are you going to leave him here?" asked Jack, who had dismounted,
+and was walking toward the old man.
+
+"Sure. What else can I do?"
+
+"Let me look at his foot," went on Jack, "I know a little bit about
+first aid to the injured. Maybe I can bandage it up,"
+
+"Better let him alone," advised Jim, mounting his horse again.
+
+But Jack was bending over the man, and had already taken off his
+shoe, which was filled with blood. As the boy was drawing off the
+sock, the man caught sight of Jack's hand.
+
+"That ring! That ring! Where did you get it?" he asked excitedly, as
+he caught sight of the moss agate emblem on Jack's finger. "Tell me,
+who are you?"
+
+Jack looked at the man in astonishment. His words and manner
+indicated that some unusual emotion stirred him. For a moment he
+gazed at the ring and then a film seemed to come over his eyes. His
+head sank forward, and a second later he toppled over.
+
+"He's dead!" exclaimed Nat.
+
+"Only fainted, I guess," replied Rattlesnake Jim coolly. "Lost
+considerable blood I reckon. He's left quite a trail, anyhow," and he
+pointed to where a crimson streak in the grass showed that the
+wounded man had crawled along.
+
+"What shall we do?" asked John. "We can't leave him here."
+
+"Don't see what else there is to do," said Jim, as he turned his
+horse back into the path. "We can't carry him. Besides, he is
+probably only one of a horse-stealing gang, and has been shot in some
+foray. Better leave him alone."
+
+"I'm not going to," declared Jack. "First I'm going to fix up his
+foot, and then we'll go for help."
+
+"I guess my uncle will see that he is taken care of," spoke Nat, with
+all a boy's confidence in things he knows nothing about.
+
+"Well, you can have your own way, of course," Jim said. "I'm only
+sent to show you the way, but if it was me I sure would leave him
+alone."
+
+By this time Jack had torn several handkerchiefs into strips to make
+bandages. Jim, who began to take interest in what the boy was doing,
+even if he did not believe in it, showed him where there was a pool
+of water. With this Jack bathed the old man's foot. It had a bad
+bullet wound in it, but the bleeding had stopped. Carefully bandaging
+the wound, Jack made a pillow out of a blanket he found rolled behind
+the saddle and with another covered the senseless form.
+
+"Now let's hurry on to the ranch, Nat," he said, "and ask your uncle
+to send out a wagon. If none of the men want to come we'll drive."
+
+"Of course we will," spoke Nat, with rather an unfriendly look at
+Jim,
+
+"Oh, I'm not so mean as that," the cowboy hastened to say. "You'll
+find out here we have to be mighty particular who we make friends
+with, son. But if you boys are so dead set on taking care of this--
+er--well, this gentleman, why I'll volunteer to drive a wagon back."
+
+"Thanks," said Jack, but from then on there was a better
+understanding between the cowboy and the three chums.
+
+The boys mounted their horses, and, as Rattlesnake Jim put his to a
+gallop, they urged their steeds to greater speed. As Nat swung up
+along side of Jack he asked:
+
+"What makes you so anxious about that old
+ man?"
+
+"Because I think he may know something of my father. Did you notice
+how excited he was about the ring? Well, that gave me a clue. He may
+be able to lead me to where my father is hiding. I must have a talk
+with him."
+
+There was considerable activity about the range when the boys and
+their guide arrived. A score of the cowboys were coming in from
+distant runs anxious for supper. Horses were being tethered for the
+night. Half a dozen dogs were barking as though their lives depended
+on it. Here and there men were running about, some carrying saddies,
+others laden down with blankets, and some hopping around and firing
+off their revolvers in sheer good feeling.
+
+From a little cabin a Chinese in the regulation blouse, with his
+queue tightly coiled about his head, came to the door.
+
+"Wood-e!-Wood-e?" he called. "Me no glet glub me no got wood-e!"
+
+"Get Chinky the cook some wood!" yelled a man who seemed to be a sort
+of overseer. One or two of the cowboys got up from the ground where
+they had thrown themselves and brought armsful to the cook's shanty.
+
+"Here we are," called Rattlesnake Jim, as he and the boys rode into
+the midst of this excitement.
+
+"Hello, Nat!" called a hearty voice. "Land alive, but I'm glad to see
+you!"
+
+The next instant a red-faced, short, stout, bald-headed man was
+nearly pulling Nat from his horse.
+
+"Hello, Uncle Morris!" called Nat. "How are you?"
+
+"Fine as silk. How about you?"
+
+"Never better," replied Nat "Here fellows, this is Uncle Morris.
+That's Jack and that's John," he added, with a wave of his hand.
+
+"Howdy!" exclaimed Mr. Kent heartily, shaking hands with his nephew's
+companions. "I'd been able to pick you out in the dark from the
+description Nat gave. Come on in, grub's almost ready."
+
+"Will you speak to him about the old man?" asked Jack of Nat, in a
+low voice.
+
+"Oh, yes, sure," and Nat told his uncle in a few words of the wounded
+one, and Jack's desire to have him brought in.
+
+"I'll send some of the men in the wagon," Mr. Kent said.
+
+"Let me go also," Jack begged, and, after some talk it was arranged
+he was to go with Jim and another cowboy.
+
+"But you must have supper first," said Mr. Kent. "I insist on that.
+Besides it's going to be a warm night, and, according to your tale,
+you left the stranger pretty comfortable. What do you think about
+him, Jim?"
+
+"Well, there's no telling," the boy's guide said. "He don't look as
+though he could do much damage. He's a stranger around here. Don't
+talk like any of the usual crowd. I was a bit leery of him at first,
+but the lads seemed to cotton to him right off, so I let 'em have
+their way."
+
+"Well, we'll see what he amounts to," Mr. Kent commented. "No harm in
+doing him a good turn I reckon."
+
+It was quite dark when Jack, accompanying Jim and Deacon Pratt,
+another cowboy, started on the wagon trip. But after a bit the moon
+arose, and the journey was not so unpleasant. Jack was much
+interested in listening to the talk of the two men. They discussed
+everything from the latest make of cartridges and revolvers to the
+best way to rope a steer and brand a maverick.
+
+"Let's see, we ought to be pretty near the place now," Jim remarked,
+after more than an hour's drive. "I think I see the big stone. Hark!
+What's that?"
+
+A low moan was heard.
+
+"That's him, I reckon," put in Deacon, who was driving. He swung the
+horse to one side, and Jim leaped down.
+
+"He's, here!" Jim called. "Pretty bad shape, I'm afraid. Come here,
+Deacon, and lend me a hand."
+
+The two men lifted the aged man into the wagon, and placed him upon a
+pile of blankets, while Jack held the team.
+
+"Do you think he's dead?" asked our hero.
+
+"Not yet, but he don't look as if he could last long," Deacon
+replied. "I'll give him a bit of liquor. It may revive him," and he
+forced a few drops of the stimulant between the cold lips.
+
+"Don't shoot!" the old man begged in a feeble tone. "I don't mean any
+harm."
+
+"It's all right," said Rattlesnake Jim, more tenderly than he had yet
+spoken.
+
+The trip back was made in quick time, and the old man was put in a
+bed Mr. Kent had ordered gotten ready for him. They were rude but
+effective doctors, those ranchmen, and, in a little while the
+stranger had revived considerably. He was suffering mostly from
+exposure, hunger and loss-of blood from his wound.
+
+The three boys were in the sitting room of the ranch house, taking
+turns telling Mr. Kent of their experiences on their trip west.
+Before they knew it the clock had struck twelve.
+
+"Now you must get off to bed," said Nat's uncle. "We'll have more
+time for swapping yarns to-morrow."
+
+At that moment a man poked his had in at the door.
+
+"What is it?" asked Mr. Kent
+
+"That party we brought in a while ago, him as is shot in the foot,
+seems to want something."
+
+"What is it?"
+
+"He says as how he's got to speak to that lad with the strange ring,
+calls him Roberts."
+
+"He means me!" exclaimed Jack.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV
+
+THE COWBOY'S TRICK
+
+
+"I thought you said your name was Ranger," said Morris Kent.
+
+"It always has been," Jack replied. "But my father has been going by
+the name of Roberts. He was known as that to his associates, because
+of the necessity for keeping him in exile. So I'll have to consider
+myself as the son of Mr. Roberts and Mr. Ranger, until we get this
+cleared up. I am trying to find my father, and I think this old man
+can aid me. He seems to have a secret."
+
+"Then you had better go and see what he has to say," Mr. Kent
+advised. Jack found the aged man propped up in bed. Though he was
+still pale, he was evidently a little better.
+
+"Let me see that ring again," he said, and Jack, who had taken to
+wearing the emblem on his finger, held out his hand.
+
+"Yes, yes; it is the same," he murmured. "I would know it among ten
+thousand, though I have never seen it before."
+
+"Who are you, and what do you know about this ring?" asked Jack. He
+had been left all alone with the old man, the cowboy who had summoned
+him, and Mr. Kent, having left the room.
+
+"I am Peter Lantry," the wounded man replied. "Until a month ago I
+lived with a man named Roberts, though his real name was Robert
+Ranger. He took his first name for his last one because of some
+scheming men. But that you know as well as I do. He told me all about
+his son, and how, if he or I ever saw him he could be identified by a
+peculiar ring, which he described. As soon as I saw the ring I knew
+you must be the boy, and I have a message for you."
+
+"What is it? Tell me quickly," said Jack.
+
+"If I was only sure," murmured the old man. "Roberts warned me to be
+careful about what I said. If I was only sure. I thought I was,--but
+now I remember--he told me to be careful."
+
+"Careful about what?" asked Jack.
+
+"How do I know you are Robert Ranger's son?" asked the sufferer. "I
+remember now, he said a stranger might get the ring. I wish I had
+kept still," and he seemed quite worried. A flush came into his pale
+cheeks, and it seemed as if he was in a fever.
+
+"If you doubt me, I can easily prove that I am Robert Ranger's son,"
+spoke Jack. "You probably know the story of Orion Tevis, and the
+Indian, Smith. His son is here now, and he has a ring just like this.
+Wait, I will call him."
+
+"No! No! Don't!" exclaimed Mr. Lantry. "I must tell you alone. Come
+closer. I am weak, and I must whisper to you what I have to say. No
+one else must hear."
+
+Jack sat down in a chair beside the bed, and the old man, looking
+carefully around the room, as though he feared some one would hear
+his secret, began:
+
+"Your father and I have lived for the past three years in a little
+hut, hidden in the Golden Glow mountains. He never ventured far away,
+and what few trips to town were necessary I made. Some time ago your
+father became sick. I am a rough sort of doctor, and I knew he needed
+some remedies for the heart. I managed to get them, and Roberts (I
+always call him by that name) grew better. But about a month ago the
+medicine got low, and I knew I must get more. You see, I only made
+two trips to civilization a year, one in the spring and one in the
+fall. In winter it is impossible to get out of the gorge where we
+live.
+
+"I knew then I must start on my summer trip earlier than usual, for
+the medicine in the shack would only last about two months. So I made
+ready to go."
+
+"But tell me how to get to where my father is," interrupted Jack.
+"That is important. I must hurry to him."
+
+"Wait a minute," spoke the old man. His brain was feeble and Jack
+realized if he hurried or confused the sufferer he might get no
+information at all.
+
+"I started away from the shack, as I said," Mr. Lantry resumed. "I
+rode my horse when I was able and led him when it was too rough. I
+had not traveled many miles before I realized that I was being
+followed. I caught several glimpses of two men, who kept close on my
+trail, and, try as I did, I could not shake them off."
+
+"Were they members of the timber gang?" asked Jack eagerly.
+
+"They were," replied Mr. Lantry. "I will be brief now, as I am
+getting weak. I hurried on, but the men kept after me. They closed in
+on me in a lonely place about fifteen miles from here, I judge."
+
+"What did they want?" asked Jack.
+
+"They demanded that I lead them to where your father was. They knew
+they could never find the place without a guide, for, doubtless, they
+had often attempted it. We had the shack well hidden, your father and
+I. Of course I refused to show them the way. And they threatened to
+torture me, but I only laughed. Then in sudden anger one of the men
+fired at me. The bullet went wild as his companion knocked his arm
+down in time, but it struck me in the foot. Then the men rode away.
+
+"I managed to keep on my horse until I fell off from weakness. Then
+my animal wandered away and I had to crawl. I got as far as the rock
+and was waiting there, hoping some one would come along, when you
+found me."
+
+"How long is it since you left my father?" asked Jack.
+
+"It is a little over three weeks."
+
+"And perhaps he is in want and suffering now," the boy cried. "I must
+hurry to him. Tell me which way to go," and Jack sprang up, as though
+to start at once in the dead of night.
+
+"You must ride until--until you--until you see--you see-"
+
+The old man's voice had been growing weaker and weaker. The last
+words came from him in a hoarse whisper, and, with a feeble moan he
+fell back on the pillow, with closed eyes.
+
+"He's dead! Help! Help!" exclaimed Jack.
+
+Mr. Kent and several cowboys came running into the room. Mr. Kent
+placed his hand over the sufferer's heart.
+
+"He is alive, but that's all," he said. "Jim, ride for the doctor."
+
+"He never told me how to find my father," said Jack in a low voice.
+"Oh, if he would only live until he can tell me that! I must go to
+him! He may be sick or dead, all alone in his cabin!"
+
+"Now don't you go to fretting, son," said Mr. Kent kindly. "You just
+come away from here and go to bed. You're all tired out and worried.
+This thing will all come out right. The old man may not be so bad off
+as he seems. We'll get a doctor for him, and he'll fix him up so he
+can tell you where your father is. If he doesn't I'll send the boys
+out, and they'll go over all the mountain ranges hereabouts. They can
+find a maverick in the wildest country you ever saw, and it would be
+a pity if they couldn't locate a cabin, with all you know about where
+it is."
+
+Jack felt encouraged at this, and said he would go to bed and try to
+sleep. His companions had retired, as he learned when he got back to
+the sitting room.
+
+"I'll give you a room on the quiet side of the house," said Mr. Kent.
+"You can change after to-night if you like."
+
+He rang a bell, summoning the Chinese cook, who it appeared "was
+housekeeper and general upstairs girl as well," and gave orders that
+a certain room should be made ready for Jack.
+
+"That loom, him sleep by Cactus Ike," said the Chinese.
+
+"Never mind whether Cactus Ike is going to sleep there or not," said
+Mr, Kent sharply. "You tell Ike he can bunk in with the rest of the
+boys. He's no better than they are."
+
+"Me sabe," replied the Celestial.
+
+Jack was too tired to pay much attention to this conversation. Nor
+did he attach any significance to a talk he heard under his windows a
+little later.
+
+"What's the matter with Ike?" he dimly heard some one ask.
+
+"Mad 'cause he got turned out of his room for one of them tenderfoot
+kids," was the answer. "I wouldn't want to get Ike down on me."
+
+"Aw, he's a big bluff."
+
+"He is, eh? Well, you wait."
+
+But, in spite of his troubles and worriment over his father, Jack was
+soon asleep from sheer weariness, and when morning came he forgot
+there was such a person as Cactus Ike.
+
+A doctor arrived from Fillmore about breakfast time and examined Mr.
+Lantry. He said the old man was very sick, and would be for some
+time. He was out of his head, from fever, and might be so for three
+weeks. With careful nursing he would recover, said the medical man,
+and he left some remedies.
+
+"We'll see that he gets well," spoke Mr. Kent. "I'll have the cook
+look after him, for I guess it will be hard to get a nurse out here."
+
+"If he only recovers his reason, so he can tell me what I want to
+know," Jack murmured.
+
+"Oh, he will," said Nat's uncle, confidently. "In the meanwhile you
+will have to be patient. Your father is in no danger now, for his
+partner did not count on getting back in over a month, and there was
+medicine enough in the cabin to last until then. Otherwise there is
+nothing to fear. You tell me the land stealers can't find the shack,
+so what else is there to worry about?"
+
+"Nothing, I suppose," replied Jack, but, somehow, he couldn't help
+worrying.
+
+"Cheer up," said Mr. Kent. "We'll get your father for you. In the
+meantime while we are waiting for the old man to get well you must
+learn ranch life, and get good and strong, so that if you do have to
+take part in a hunt for him you will be able to stand roughing it."
+
+Jack thought this was good advice, as did his chums. They raced out
+of the house after breakfast, determined to see all there was to see.
+But this, they found, would take a long time.
+
+Mr. Kent's ranch took in about a thousand acres. Some of it was on
+the first plateau, and part among the hills, where the cattle grazed.
+Besides the house, there were stables for the horses, kennels for the
+dogs, a cook house, a dining shack, the sides of which could be
+thrown open in the summer, barns for hay and grain, and a big tall
+windmill that pumped water.
+
+"Can we have regular horses while we're here?" asked Nat of his
+uncle, as he and his chums started for the stable yard.
+
+"Sure," replied Mr. Kent "You just go over there and tell Rattlesnake
+Jim I said he was to fit you out with a horse and saddle each. He
+knows which will be the best for you, better than I do. I don't have
+time to keep track of the animals. I'm going to be busy all the
+morning, so you can do as you please, within reason. Don't stampede
+the cattle, that's all," and he turned away with a laugh.
+
+The boys looked around the stable enclosure for their friend Jim, but
+he was not to be seen.
+
+"Lookin' for any one?" inquired a tall cowboy, who appeared from
+under the shed. He had small, black shifty eyes, and when he spoke he
+looked anywhere but at one.
+
+"Where's Mr.--er--Mr. Rattlesnake Jim?" asked Nat. He was not exactly
+sure how to address, or speak of the cowboys with their queer titles.
+
+"Jim? Oh, he's gone over on the Spring range. Was you wantin'
+anything?"
+
+"Only some horses," said Nat.
+
+"Oh, you're the boys," spoke the man. "Did Mr. Kent say you are to
+have 'em?"
+
+"Uncle Morris said Jim would give us horses to ride," Nat went on.
+
+"Well, I guess I can pick 'em out for you," the man said. "One of you
+boys named Ranger?"
+
+"I am," said Jack,
+
+"Oh, yes, you're a friend of the old man who was shot," went on the
+cowboy as he entered the stable. "Well, I'll pick out horses I
+think'll suit."
+
+He disappeared into the regions of the stalls, and soon came out,
+leading a fine black horse. He threw a saddle over its back. The
+animal seemed a bit restive.
+
+"Here's your horse, Ranger," the cowboy called.
+
+"Is he safe?" asked Jack. "I'm not a very good rider."
+
+"A girl could manage him," was the answer. "See, he's as gentle as a
+lamb," and so it seemed for the man opened the animal's mouth and put
+his hand in.
+
+Thus encouraged, Jack mounted, and the horse moved off at a slow
+pace.
+
+"I guess he's all right," Jack thought
+
+In a few more minutes two more horses were saddled, and Nat and John
+had mounted.
+
+"Now for a good gallop over the plain," called Nat, as he led the way
+from the stable yard.
+
+Jack was the last to ride forth. As he was passing the gate that
+closed the corral he heard some one call to the man who had just
+saddled the steeds:
+
+"Who'd you give the black horse to, Ike?"
+
+"None of your business," was the reply. "I'm running this game."
+
+"Ike," thought Jack. "I wonder where I heard that name before." Then
+the memory of the conversation under his window came to him. "Oh,
+well, guess it's all right to have this horse," the boy thought. "I
+can't harm him."
+
+As the cowboy turned back into the stable a grim smile passed over
+his face.
+
+"Good gallop!" he muttered. "Lucky if you don't break your neck."
+
+"Come on! I'll race you!" called Nat, and the three boys were soon
+speeding over the level plain.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI
+
+JACK'S WILD RIDE
+
+
+The boys thought they had never been on such fine horses. The animals
+had an easy gallop that carried one over the ground at a rapid pace,
+yet which was not hard for a beginner.
+
+"Talk about your sport!" exclaimed Jack. "This is glorious; eh,
+John?"
+
+"Best thing I ever struck," replied the Indian. "I feel like my wild
+ancestors, riding forth to battle. Whoop! la Whoopee! Whoop ah
+Whoope! Wow! Wow!! Wow!"
+
+It was a regular Indian war-cry that issued from John's mouth, and,
+leaning forward on his horse's neck, he urged the beast to a terrific
+pace.
+
+No sooner had the strange cry vibrated through the air than Jack's
+horse gave a bound that nearly unseated its rider. It leaped forward
+so suddenly that Jack was almost flung off backward. Then the steed,
+taking the bit in its teeth, bolted like the wind. Jack recovered
+himself with much difficulty. He tried to sit upright, but found he
+had not skill enough for the task. There was nothing for it but to
+lean forward and clasp the horse about the neck. In this way he was
+safe, for a time, from being tossed off.
+
+The horse turned from its straight course and began to gallop around
+in a large circle. Then it made sudden dashes to the right and left,
+turning so quickly that several times Jack was nearly thrown off.
+
+"The horse is mad!" cried Nat, urging his own steed forward, with an
+idea of trying to catch the one Jack rode.
+
+The animal's next move seemed to bear this out. It reared on its hind
+legs and pawed the air with its powerful fore-feet. Jack would have
+been thrown off, but for the tight neck-hold he had. Next the beast
+kicked its hind feet into the air, and Jack came near sliding to the
+neck.
+
+"Drop off!" cried Nat.
+
+"Stay on!" shouted John, who, seeing his friend's plight, had turned
+and was riding back.
+
+"He'll be killed if he stays on," shouted Nat.
+
+"Yes, and he'll be trampled to death if he leaps off," called back
+John. "He's a balky horse, I guess."
+
+"I think he's a mad one."
+
+The next instant the animal, that had been rushing straight ahead,
+came to such an abrupt halt that Jack was actually flung from the
+saddle. He went right up into the air and slid along the horse's
+side. Only the grip he had of the neck and the mane saved him from
+falling. Before the horse could make another start the boy had
+wiggled back to his seat.
+
+Then came what was probably the hardest part of it all. The horse
+gathered its four feet under it and rose straight up in the air,
+coming down with legs stiff as sticks. Jack was not prepared for this
+and the resulting jar nearly knocked the breath from him.
+
+"He's a bucking bronco!" cried John. "Rise in your stirrups when he
+lands next time."
+
+This Jack did, with the result that the jar came on his legs, and was
+not so bad.
+
+Finding it could not thus rid itself of it's persistent rider, the
+horse began to run straight ahead again. It went so fast that the
+wind whistled in Jack's ears, and he was in fear lest he be thrown
+off at this terrific speed, and injured. He held on for dear life.
+
+But the horse had still another trick. Stopping again with a
+suddenness that nearly unseated Jack, it dropped to the ground and
+started to roll over, hoping to crush the boy on its back.
+
+"Get out of the way, quick!" called John, who was watching every
+move.
+
+Jack did so, just in time to escape having his leg broken.
+
+"The horse must be crazy," said Nat, who had never seen such antics
+in a steed before.
+
+"There's some reason for it," commented John. "There he goes!"
+
+The horse was up an instant later, and dashed off, but had not gone a
+hundred yards before the saddle fell to the ground, the holding
+straps having broken. At this the animal stopped, and seemed all over
+its excitement.
+
+"That's funny," said John. He dismounted from his horse and ran
+toward Jack's animal. The horse allowed himself to be taken by the
+briddle and lead, showing no sign of fear. John bent over and was
+examining the saddle.
+
+"I guess your yell must have scared him," spoke Jack. "It was the
+worst I ever heard."
+
+"It wasn't that," replied John. "Western horses are used to all sorts
+of yells. Ah, I thought so," he went on, "this explains it."
+
+He pulled something from the underside of the pad and held it up to
+view. It was a long cactus thorn.
+
+"That was what bothered the horse," John said. "It must have been
+torture to have any one on the saddle. See there," and he pointed to
+several drops of blood on the animal's back.
+
+"Why didn't it act so as soon as I got on?" asked Jack.
+
+"Some one has played a trick," said John "See, the thorn was trapped
+in cloth, so the point would not work through until the horse had
+been ridden some distance. I wonder who did it, and what for?"
+
+"I know," Jack exclaimed, as the memory of the talk under his window
+the night previous came to him. "It was Cactus Ike," and he told what
+he had heard. "He wanted to get even with me for having been the
+cause of his being turned out of his room. No wonder they call him
+Cactus Ike."
+
+"I'll tell uncle Morris," cried Nat.
+
+"No, say nothing about it," counseled John. "We'll get square in our
+own way. Pretend nothing happened. If Ike asks us how we liked the
+ride, we'll never let on we had any trouble. It will keep him
+guessing."
+
+The broken straps were repaired and, by making a pad of his
+handkerchief Jack was able to adjust the saddle without causing the
+horse any pain. The animal seemed quite friendly, after all the
+excitement, which was only caused by its efforts to get rid of the
+terrible thorn that was driving it frantic. In its roll it had
+accomplished this, and had no further objection to carrying a boy on
+its back.
+
+Cactus Ike cast several inquiring glances at the lads as they rode
+into the ranch yard about an hour later. But he did not ask any
+questions. As the chums were going toward the house Jack heard one of
+the cowboys remark to Ike:
+
+"The black horse looks as if it had been ridden pretty hard."
+
+"I'll make him ride harder next time," muttered Ike, but whether he
+referred to the horse or to himself, Jack was not sure. He watched
+and saw Ike looking at the sore on the animal, over which the boy's
+handkerchief was still spread. Jack's first inquiry was as to the
+condition of Old Peter Lantry.
+
+"He's no better," replied Mr. Kent "You'll have to be patient, Jack.
+All things come to him who waits. Did you have a good ride?"
+
+"I got lots of practice," replied Jack, not caring to go into
+details.
+
+"Can't get too much of it," replied Nat's uncle. "You can see some
+good examples this afternoon."
+
+"How's that?" asked Nat.
+
+"Some of the boys are going to have a little sport among themselves,"
+replied his uncle. "They do every once in a while when the work gets
+slack. They're coming in from some of the outlying ranches, about
+forty of 'em, I guess."
+
+"What'll they do?" asked Jack.
+
+"You'll see," replied Mr. Kent.
+
+Before dinner time the cowboys began arriving. And in what a hurly-
+burly manner did they come! On their fleet horses or cow-ponies they
+rode along the trails as if it was in the early days and a tribe of
+wild Indians was after them. They came up on the gallop, shouting,
+yelling, and firing their big revolvers off into the air.
+
+Up they would rush, almost to the porch that surrounded the house.
+Then they would suddenly pull their horses back on their haunches and
+leap off with a whoop, the well-trained beasts standing stock-still
+when the bridle was thrown over their heads.
+
+Then began such play as the boys had never seen before,--such riding
+as is not even seen in the best of the Wild West shows. The men
+seemed part of the horses they bestrode, as the animals fairly flew
+over the ground.
+
+"If we could only do that!" exclaimed Nat.
+
+"Maybe we can, with practice," said Jack. "John has learned a lot
+already."
+
+"But he knew some before he came here," replied Nat.
+
+The men had impromptu contests to see who could pick up the most
+handkerchiefs from the ground, leaning from their saddles as their
+horses galloped past. They picked up potatoes in the same way. They
+roped wild steers, dropping the lariat over a designated horn or leg,
+and throwing the animal on whichever side the judge suddenly called
+on them to do.
+
+Then such shooting at marks as there was! The men used their
+revolvers with almost the skill of rifles. They cut cards, punctured
+cans tossed high in the air, and clipped upright sticks at distances
+from which the boys could scarcely make out the marks.
+
+It was an afternoon of wild, exciting, blood-stirring and yet
+healthy, clean fun, and the boys were so worked up they hardly knew
+whether they were standing on their heads or their feet.
+
+The last contest of the day had been called. It was a test between
+two of the most skillful cowboys, to see who could lasso the other.
+As they were circling around on their horses, each seeking an
+opening, there came dashing up the road a man, on a foam-flecked
+steed. He put the horse right at the fence, which it leaped, and rode
+to where Mr. Kent stood.
+
+"The cattle on the upper range have stampeded!" he yelled. "They're
+headed for the canyon!"
+
+"Here boys!" shouted Mr. Kent. "Sharp work now! Send my horse here!
+We must head 'em off!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII
+
+THE CATTLE STAMPEDE
+
+
+If there had been confusion and excitement before there was more of
+it now. Yet no one lost his head. There was a way of going about it,
+and though it seemed as if everyone was running here and there,
+without an object, there was a well-worked-out system evident.
+
+The cowboys began looking to their saddle girths, for there was hard
+riding ahead of them. Some ran to the supply house for extra
+cartridges, and these were hurriedly thrust into belts or pockets.
+Coats and hats that had been discarded were donned, and several men
+began packing up some bacon and hardtack, while others strapped
+simple camp outfits back of their saddles, for there was no telling
+how long they would be obliged to be on the trail.
+
+"Come on! Let's go!" cried Jack, and he and his two chums raced for
+the stables.
+
+"Will they let us, do you think?" asked John, whose eyes sparkled at
+the thought of the chase.
+
+"Of course," replied Nat. "Uncle said he wanted us to learn the ranch
+business. I'll ask him."
+
+But Nat did not get a chance. Mr. Kent was too busy preparing to ride
+after his stampeded cattle to pay any attention to the three boys. It
+is doubtful if he thought of them.
+
+So the chums, without further permission than Nat's idea that it
+would be all right, saddled their horses, Jack taking the black which
+he had come to like very much. They rode from the corral and out on
+the road that led to the north where the upper range lay. The lads at
+once found themselves in the rear of a galloping throng of cowboys.
+
+"Come on, let's get up ahead," shouted Nat, and they urged their
+horses forward, passing the others. When they were almost in the van
+a voice hailed them:
+
+"Where you boys going?"
+
+They turned, to see Mr. Kent riding toward them.
+
+"Oh," said Nat, a little confused. "We thought you'd want us to go to
+learn how to manage a herd of cattle."
+
+"Manage stampeding cattle," muttered Mr. Kent. "You boys must be
+crazy. But it's too late to send you back, I suppose. Only don't ride
+your horses to death the first thing. You've got lots of work ahead
+of you."
+
+With this encouragement the chums dropped back, listening to the talk
+of the cowboys about what was ahead of them.
+
+"Remember the last stampede," one tall lanky rider asked his
+neighbor, who was nearly the same build.
+
+"The one where Loony Pete was trampled to death?"
+
+"That's the one. The steers sure made mincemeat of him all right.
+Hope no one gets down under foot this trip."
+
+The boys looked at each other. This was a more dangerous undertaking
+than they had anticipated.
+
+The riders advanced at an even, if not rapid pace. The cowboys as
+their horses ambled on were loading revolvers, looking to their
+lariats, tightening the packs which they carried on the back of their
+saddles, and making ready for the hard task ahead of them.
+
+From listening to the talk, the boys learned that the upper range was
+about five miles distant, and was where the choicest cattle were
+herded, preparatory to being shipped away. The range was a big one,
+but, about ten miles from it, was a deep and dangerous canyon, at the
+beginning of the hills, which as they grew larger became the range of
+Golden Glow mountains. It was toward this canyon that the steers were
+headed, in a wild, unreasoning rush.
+
+It seemed impossible for the cowboys to get ahead of them in time to
+head them off. But the cattle had a longer way to travel than did the
+men, and the latter could take a diagonal course and, if they had
+luck, reach the edge of the canyon first. It was planned to get
+between the oncoming herd and the edge of the gulch, and turn the
+steers back, if possible.
+
+"Better hit up the pace!" exclaimed Mr. Kent, when they had ridden
+several miles. "We don't want to be too late."
+
+The boys, realized, as did the men, that if the cattle, in their
+rush, reached the canyon, they would pile up in the bottom, and
+hundreds would be killed.
+
+The horses were now galloped and the cavalcade raised quite a dust as
+it hastened over the prairie. The men began lossening the revolvers
+in their belts, and several unslung their lariats, ready for instant
+use. In about half an hour they began to ascend a slight rise that
+led to a plateau which extended into the range. Ahead of them, and
+about two miles to their right, lay the gulch.
+
+"Well, we're here first!" exclaimed Mr. Kent, as he topped the rise
+and glanced to the left.
+
+"Hark!" cried Rattlesnake Jim, who rode next to him. "I hear 'em!"
+
+A noise like distant thunder sounded over the plain. Then, about
+three miles away, there arose something that looked like a dark
+cloud.
+
+The sound of thunder came nearer. The dust cloud was plainly to be
+seen. Right ahead, so as to cross it on the slant, rode the group of
+men. The boys were in the rear. Mr. Kent gave a glance back and saw
+them. He shouted something but the chums could not hear him amid the
+pounding of hoofs. They saw the ranchman make signals, but did not
+understand them.
+
+Then they saw several men from the front rank of the cowboys circle
+around and come up behind them.
+
+"You young rascals!" exclaimed Rattlesnake Jim. "You ought to be
+spanked for coming along! Mr. Kent says to keep in the middle now.
+We're going to ride behind and keep your horses on the go. If they
+lag behind you're liable to be killed!"
+
+Things began to look serious now. The lads found themselves in the
+midst of a throng of cowboys, and the horses of the chums, being
+surrounded by steeds ridden by experienced cattlemen, picked up their
+pace and went forward on the rush.
+
+Closer and closer approached the dark cloud. Nearer and nearer
+sounded the thunderous pounding of hoofs. Then, as the boys looked,
+they could see through the dust that was blown aside by a puff of
+wind, thousands of cattle, with heads on which flashed long, sharp,
+wide-spreading horns, rushing madly along.
+
+"Wow! Wow! Wow!" yelled a score of cowboys.
+
+Bang! Bang! Bang! spoke a score of big revolvers.
+
+"Right across now!" yelled Mr. Kent. "Try and turn 'em! If we don't
+do it, then back again, once more!"
+
+Then began such a ride as the boys had never dreamed of. Across the
+ragged front of the maddened animals the men urged their horses on a
+long slant. Lying low in their saddles, holding on with one hand, and
+firing revolvers with the other, the cowboys rode, there being no
+need to guide the trained horses.
+
+Bang! Bang! Bang! It was like a skirmish line firing on the enemy.
+The boys, who had secured revolvers as they rushed to the stables,
+fired as the men did, right in the faces of the advancing steers. The
+cartridges were blank, but so close were some of the men that the
+burning wadding struck the cattle.
+
+Could they stop the rush? Could the maddened and frightened steers be
+halted before they plunged over the cliffs?
+
+The line of cattle was about a quarter of a mile wide. In less than
+two minutes the cowboys, with the three chums in their midst, had
+swept across it. But the steers had not stopped. They were several
+hundred feet nearer the canyon, which now was but a mile away. There
+would be time for but one, or possibly two more attempts, and then it
+would be too late.
+
+But the cowboys never halted. Wheeling sharply, they dashed once more
+across the front of the steers. Their yells were wilder than ever,
+and the shooting was a continuous rattle.
+
+"Rope some on the edges!" yelled Mr. Kent.
+
+At that some of the cowboys rode back and, whirling their lariats
+above their heads, sent the coils about the horns of some on the left
+fringe. The animals went down in a heap, right in the midst and under
+the hoofs of the others. Of course they were trampled to death, but
+this was the means of causing a number to stumble and fall, and so
+halt those back of them.
+
+This could only be done on the two outer edges. To have attempted
+this in the center of the stampeding herd would have meant death for
+the cowboy who tried it.
+
+The second dash across the front had been made, and the frightened
+cattle had not been more than momentarily stopped. They were still
+rushing toward the cliff.
+
+"Once more!" called Mr. Kent. "This is our last chance!"
+
+The canyon was hut a quarter of a mile away, If the rush was not
+stopped now, it meant the death of many valuable animals, and the
+possible scattering of the herd.
+
+Again across the front, bristling with waving horns, rode the brave
+men. Their revolvers spat out fire and the smoke almost obscured the
+oncoming steers. The men yelled until their throats were parched.
+
+"Make a stand! Make a stand!" yelled Mr. Kent.
+
+The cowboys bunched together, riding their horses in a circle, the
+center of which was the boys. For a moment it seemed as if death was
+coming to meet them on the wings of the wind.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII
+
+HUNTING MOUNTAIN LIONS
+
+
+"Wow! Wow! Wow!" yelled the cowboys, in desperation.
+
+To the noise John added his Indian warwhoop, and again the men began
+firing revolvers, which had been rapidly reloaded. It was a critical
+moment. It was the turning point of the stampede. Back, back, back
+the rushing cattle forced the men, who still kept circling. Now the
+canyon was but two hundred feet away.
+
+And then, almost as suddenly as it had been started, the stampede was
+over. The foremost cattle slowed up. They raised their heads, and
+bellowed. For a few seconds the front line was pushed ahead by those
+behind. Then all through the herd seemed to go a message that the run
+was over.
+
+Plowing the dirt up with their feet, as they vainly tried to stop,
+but could not because of the push that still was exerted behind them,
+the foremost cattle advanced nearly to the knot of horsemen. But the
+cowboys did not budge, knowing it was ended now. Then, with loud
+shouts and waving hats they turned the herd so that it circled around
+and was started back toward the range.
+
+So close were the rear men to the canyon, when this had been done
+that they could have tossed a stone down into the depths.
+
+"Narrow squeak, that!" observed Rattlesnake Jim, as he wiped the
+sweat from his forehead with a big red handkerchief. "'Bout as close
+as I want 'em," observed Mr. Kent. "I wonder what started 'em off
+this way."
+
+"Maybe it was mountain lions," said Jim. "I heard there was quite a
+few around lately, looking for nice juicy young calves."
+
+"It wasn't lions that started 'em this time," said the man who had
+brought word of the stampede, and who had ridden with the others from
+the ranch.
+
+"What was it then?" asked Mr. Kent.
+
+"It was done by two men, so some of the boys told me, just before I
+started out," replied the messenger. "They said they saw a couple of
+strangers hanging about the range the other night, but didn't think
+anything of it. We were all in the range house this morning, getting
+breakfast, when, all of a sudden, the steers started off."
+
+"But what made 'em &o?" asked Mr. Kent.
+
+"Some of the boys saw these strange men starting a fire close to some
+of the cows," explained the messenger. "The grass was dry, and, in
+one place it burned quite hard. Some of the steers got scorched
+before they knew what was happening, and they went off on the dead
+run. The two men trampled out the fire, and ran away. The
+ boys started after the cattle, and sent me on to tell you."
+
+"This will have to be looked into," murmured Mr. Kent. "But now let's
+get the cattle back on the range."
+
+It was nearly dusk when this had been accomplished, and it was a
+tired and weary throng of men and boys that started for the ranch
+house in the gathering twilight. The horses could only amble along,
+for the strain had been hard on them as well as on the men.
+
+The next few days the boys spent in going about the ranch, close to
+the house. They were much in company with Rattlesnake Jim, who took
+pleasure in telling them things all good cowboys should know. He
+showed them how to make a lariat, and even instructed them a bit in
+its use, though John needed but few lessons to become almost as
+expert as his teacher. Jim told them the best way to camp out on the
+plains at night, how to make their fires, and warned them to be
+careful not to set the grass ablaze in dry weather. He also showed
+them how to tether their horses, the best way of adjusting a saddle,
+and instructed them in the art of finding their way at night by the
+stars.
+
+In short the boys learned more in a few days from Jim than they could
+have picked up alone in a month. They were so enthusiastic that they
+would have sat up all night listening to their new teacher.
+
+As for riding, the lads improved very much as Jim showed them how to
+mount, how to sit, how to guide the horse by the mere pressure of the
+knees, and other tricks of which a "tenderfoot" never dreams.
+
+After supper, one evening, when the boys, Mr. Kent and Rattlesnake
+Jim were in the sitting room, a common resting place for all on the
+ranch, Jack asked:
+
+"Are there really mountain lions around here?"
+
+"There used to be," said Mr. Kent, "but I haven't seen any lately."
+
+"I heard some of the boys from the upper range say they heard 'em, a
+few nights ago," spoke Jim.
+
+"That ought to be looked into," said Mr. Kent. "They're nasty
+customers to get among a herd."
+
+"Can't we go hunting 'em?" asked Nat.
+
+"What do you know about hunting mountain lions?" asked his uncle.
+"They'd eat you up."
+
+"Not if we took Jim along," put in Jack.
+
+"I shot a lynx once," said John.
+
+"That's nothing like a mountain lion," Mr. Kent remarked.
+
+"Can't we go?" pleaded Nat.
+
+"I'll see about it," his uncle answered.
+
+He did see about it, with such good effect that, a few days later he
+called the boys in and showed them three fine rifles.
+
+"Can you shoot?" he asked.
+
+"A little," they replied, wondering what was coming.
+
+"Then take these and see if you and Jim can bag a few lions," Mr,
+Kent went on. "I hear they got a couple of calves last night. Now--
+now--never mind thanking me," as the boys fairly stuttered their
+expressions of surprise and happiness. "Better see Jim and get
+ready."
+
+The boys lost no time in doing this. They found Jim almost as pleased
+as they were. The cowboy at once began preparing a camping outfit,
+and that night he announced they would start in the morning.
+
+"For how long?" asked Mr. Kent.
+
+"We'll make it four days, if the boys can stand it," Jim replied.
+
+The haunt of the lions was in a range of low foothills to the north
+of the range from which the herd had stampeded. It was planned to
+ride to the house where the cowboys in charge of that bunch of cattle
+lived, and there leave the horses. They would proceed on foot up into
+the hills, where the trails were so rough that horses were of little
+use.
+
+They camped that night at the ranch house, and the boys hardly wanted
+to go to bed when Jim and some of his acquaintances began to swap
+stories around the fire.
+
+"Better turn in," advised Jim, about ten o'clock. "Have to be up
+before sunrise, you know."
+
+The next morning they tramped for several miles, the country getting
+wilder and wilder as they proceeded. The trail was up now, for they
+had entered the region of the foothills. Beyond them lay the
+beginning of the Golden Glow mountain range.
+
+"That's where my father is," Jack thought "I hope I can soon find
+him."
+
+It was almost noon when they reached a spot that Jim decided would be
+a good place to camp. It was under a sort of overhanging ledge, and
+well screened by trees.
+
+"We'll leave our stuff here," he said, "and, after dinner, the real
+hunting will begin."
+
+Little time was lost over the meal, and, having seen to their rifles
+and knives, the four hunters started along the trail, making their
+way through low brush and over big boulders. Jack who had forged
+ahead, with Jim close behind him, was suddenly pulled back by the
+cowboy's hand,
+
+"Look there!" exclaimed Jim.
+
+In a soft place in the ground, just where he was about to set his
+foot, Jack saw some peculiar marks.
+
+"The tracks of a mountain lion!" Jim exclaimed in a whisper. "He's
+been here only a short time ago, for the marks are fresh. Look out,
+now, boys!"
+
+The three lads needed no other caution. They got ready with their
+rifles, while Jim advanced a bit to see in which direction the beast
+had gone.
+
+"Follow me," he said in a whisper as he came back. "He must be just
+ahead of us, and the wind is blowing from him to us. We ought to get
+him!"
+
+Stepping as cautiously as possible, and taking care not to tread on
+loose stones, or sticks, that would break and betray their presence,
+the four began stalking the lion. That they were coming closer to the
+beast was evidenced by the increasing plainness of the tracks.
+
+"He's heading for his den," whispered Jim. "We must get him before he
+reaches it or we'll lose him."
+
+There was a sort of path along which the hunters were traveling, and
+which seemed to be one regularly used by the lion. It made a sudden
+turn, to get past a big boulder that jutted out from the side of the
+hill. As Jim and the boys rounded this, they came to an abrupt halt,
+and each one gazed with startled eyes at a ledge of rock, just beyond
+and ahead of them.
+
+There, in full view, with the sun streaming down on him, was an
+immense mountain lion. He was facing away from the hunters, and this,
+with the fact that the wind was blowing from him to them, had enabled
+them to get within a hundred yards.
+
+Slowly Jim leveled his rifle. Then he seemed to think of something,
+and stopped.
+
+"You boys try, all together," he said in such a faint whisper that it
+sounded like the breeze. "If you miss I'll bowl him over."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX
+
+LOST ON THE MOUNTAIN
+
+
+Up to that time the boys had been as cool, almost, as Jim himself.
+But, at the idea that they were to slay the big and fierce creature
+standing so majestically before them, they experienced a touch of
+what is called "buck fever." Their hands shook so they could not
+sight their rifles. Even John, half Indian as he was, showed the
+effects of it.
+
+"Steady," whispered Jim. "You're only shooting at a mark!"
+
+At once the nerves of the boys quieted. Their hands became firm, and,
+raising their rifles they all took careful aim at the lion. Jim was
+watching them.
+
+"Fire!" he suddenly exclaimed in a whisper, and the three rifles
+sounded as one.
+
+Following the report, and mingling with it, came a scream so shrill
+and full of terror that the boys could not help jumping. Through the
+smoke they could see a big, tawny, yellow body leap high into the
+air, and then, falling back, begin to claw the earth and stones,
+while the screams continued to ring out.
+
+"You nailed her!" cried Jim.
+
+Hardly had he spoken before there was a rattling sound behind them.
+All four turned, to see, crouching, not twenty feet away, a big, male
+mountain lion, ready to spring. It was the mate of the female the
+boys had just mortally wounded, and the big beast's eyes flashed fire
+as it saw the death struggles of its den-mate.
+
+For a moment the hunters stood as if paralyzed. The sight of the lion
+in their rear had unnerved them. The male must have been stalking
+them, just as they had followed the other. As they watched, a sudden
+tremor seemed to run through the big brute's body.
+
+"He's going to spring!" said Jim, in a low voice. At the same moment
+he brought his gun up, ready to fire.
+
+An instant later the lion launched itself forward, propelled by
+muscles like steel springs, straight at the group, anger blazing in
+its eyes.
+
+Bang! spoke Jim's rifle, and the big cat seemed to turn completely
+over in the air.
+
+But the momentum of the spring was not checked by the bullet which
+had struck it in the throat. On it came, and Jim yelled:
+
+"Duck boys!"
+
+He had no time to do so himself, so, before he could throw himself to
+one side, the lion was upon him and the cowboy went down in a heap,
+the beast, snarling and growling, on top of him. There was a
+confusion of man and lion, a vision of flying legs, fast-working
+claws and the sight of a yellow body in convulsions.
+
+"Fire at the lion!" yelled Jack.
+
+"Don't! You might shoot Jim!" exclaimed Nat.
+
+"Get your knives out!" cried John, drawing his own blade.
+
+But they were not needed. A moment later the big cat rolled over off
+Jim, and, in a few seconds the cowboy rose from the ground, covered
+with dirt and blood, but, apparently unhurt.
+
+"Did he bite you?" asked Jack,
+
+"He was dead when he landed on me," said Jim. "It was only the dying
+struggle. Might have clawed me up a bit, but not much."
+
+In fact the cowboy had several long and deep scratches on his hands
+and legs, where his heavy trousers had been cut through by the
+terrible claws. Aside from that he was not hurt.
+
+"Good thing I had a load in my gun," he remarked, as he threw out the
+empty shell and fired a bullet through the head of the lion to make
+sure it was dead.
+
+"I guess the other one's done for," said Jack, as he looked toward
+where the lioness had stood.
+
+"I'd hope so, with three of you firin' at her," spoke Jim as he went
+over to a little spring and washed some of the dirt and blood from
+him.
+
+"This isn't half bad," spoke Nat. "I wish some of the fellows at
+Washington Hall could see us now."
+
+"Maybe they would think we were some pumpkins," put in Jack.
+
+"Oh we'll do better than this," said John. "We want to get one
+apiece, instead of a third each."
+
+"That's so," admitted Jack and Nat.
+
+It was decided they had enjoyed sport enough for one day, so they
+went back to their little camp and prepared to spend the night. In
+the morning they journeyed to the small ranch house and some of the
+cowboys went for the dead lions and skinned them. The boys were a
+little anxious as to who would have the trophies, but there was no
+need of this, as, in the next two days three more of the lions were
+slain. Jack and John each bowled over one, not so very large, to be
+sure, but enough to make the lads feel several inches taller. Nat had
+poor luck, missing two fine chances. However, he was not discouraged.
+
+The boys were congratulated on all sides when they got back to Mr.
+Kent's house, even the oldest plainsman admitting they had not done
+so bad for tenderfeet.
+
+Aside from long rides, in which they learned to be more proficient on
+horses, the boys did little for the week following the hunt. Jack
+made anxious inquiries every day after the condition of Peter Lantry,
+hoping the aged man might have regained his senses enough to give
+directions for finding Mr. Ranger's cabin. But the fever still held
+the old miner (for such his delirious talk showed him to have been) a
+captive, and locked his brain in an impenetrable mantle.
+
+"It's hard to sit around and do nothing, when you know your father
+may need you," Jack said, one day. "I'm going to ask Mr. Kent if I
+can't go myself, alone, and find the cabin. I believe I could, from
+Mr. Tevis's directions."
+
+"What do you want to go alone for?" asked Nat. "Why can't John and I
+go along?"
+
+"I didn't want to take you on a dangerous trip," Jack replied.
+
+"Well, I guess you'd find it hard to leave us behind," John put in.
+"Come on, let's ask if we can't go."
+
+At first Mr. Kent would not hear of it. But the boys pleaded so hard,
+and Jack seemed to feel so badly at the delay, that Mr. Kent gave in,
+He admitted there was no telling when Mr. Lantry would recover enough
+to give directions, and it would certainly be a very long time before
+he would be able to guide a party to the scene.
+
+So it was arranged that the three boys were to make the hundred mile
+trip to Golden Glow. It was not as venturesome as it sounded. They
+had come west in safety, and gone through a number of perils with
+credit to themselves. Then, too, it was in summer, and camping in the
+open was fun, more than anything else. It was true the trail was a
+hard one, but, by going a roundabout way, horses could be used for
+the greater distance. Mr. Kent wanted to send Rattlesnake Jim with
+the boys, but they would not hear of it.
+
+"I guess we can look out for ourselves," said Jack. "If we can't,
+it's time we learned."
+
+Three days later saw them on the trail. They had sturdy horses, used
+to mountain roads, a camping outfit and provisions that would last
+them two weeks, with plenty of ammunition, and each one carried a
+fine rifle.
+
+They rode along for four days, camping at night in such sheltered
+places as they could find. The morning of the fifth day they awoke to
+find the mountain shrouded in fog.
+
+"That shan't delay us," exclaimed Jack, though it was hard to see a
+rod ahead of the horse's nose. "We have a compass and we can follow
+the general direction Mr. Tevis gave us."
+
+So they traveled on after breakfast, though it was dreary riding.
+They plodded on for mile after mile in silence. All at once Jack, who
+was ahead exclaimed:
+
+"Doesn't that tree look familiar?"
+
+He pointed to one that had been struck by lightning, and which had a
+peculiar spiral white mark running down the trunk. It was close to
+the edge of the trail.
+
+"It sure does," admitted John.
+
+"I remember passing that before," Nat said. "What of it?"
+
+"It means that we have wandered around in a circle," Jack answered.
+"We are lost on the mountains!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX
+
+A VIEW OF GOLDEN GLOW
+
+
+For a moment Jack's words struck a chill to the hearts of his
+companions. The fog seemed to wrap around them like an impenetrable
+blanket, from which they sought in vain to escape. A little breeze
+stirred the wreaths of vapor, but did not disperse them.
+
+"Lost!" repeated Nat, as if he could not believe it.
+
+"I guess you're right," admitted John. "Now wait a minute. Where's
+the compass?"
+
+"Here," spoke Jack, feeling in his pocket for it. A blank look came
+over his face. He hurriedly looked through several pockets. "I've
+lost it!" he exclaimed.
+
+"Well, never mind," John went on calmly. He seemed to rise to the
+emergency, and become collected in the face of the danger that
+confronted them. "I guess I haven't got Indian blood in me for
+nothing. I can tell which way is north, anyhow."
+
+"You can?" asked Nat. "How, in all this fog?"
+
+"There's more moss on the north side of a tree than on any other,"
+John replied. "We were going in a northerly direction so, all we have
+to do is to keep on, stopping once in a while to see how the moss
+is."
+
+It sounded like good advice, and Nat and Jack felt better after
+hearing it. They started off again, more hopeful, and went slowly for
+a while, stopping now and then, to see about the moss, or "nature's
+compass," as Jack called it.
+
+They must have traveled a number of miles, when they decided it was
+time to camp and eat something. They looked around for some dry wood
+for a fire, seeking for it under overhanging rocks as Jim had showed
+them how to do. They managed to start a blaze, and John was frying
+some bacon, incidentally trying to keep the smoke from his eyes, when
+Nat, who had gone a short distance off the trail, exclaimed:
+
+"Say fellows; look here!"
+
+"See a bear?" asked Jack.
+
+"No, but here's our old friend, the queer tree!" he called. "We're
+back in the same place."
+
+Jack and John ran to where Nat stood. There was the lightning-scarred
+trunk. Once more they had traveled in a circle. They had not read the
+moss signs aright.
+
+It was such a shock that, for a few moments, the boys did not know
+what to say. They had been so sure they were journeying in the right
+direction, that, to find they had merely gone back on their own
+trail, was more than discouraging.
+
+"Thought you said you knew how to read signs, and where north was,"
+spoke Jack, looking at John.
+
+"Well, I thought I did," the Indian replied. "I'm sure I am right,
+only I think we must have made a mistake in our directions."
+
+"Well, we're here, and what are we going to do?" asked Nat.
+
+About them the fog swirled, lazily moving this way and that, in
+response to gentle puffs of wind, but never lifting enough to enable
+them to get a glimpse of the sun, to determine where they were, or in
+which direction to travel.
+
+"Let's eat, anyhow," suggested Jack. "We'll feel better after that."
+
+It was no very cheerful meal, and they were three very much worried
+boys. They said little while partaking of the bacon, bread and
+coffee, the horses cropping the sparse grass near by. But, in a
+little while, Jack laughed.
+
+"What's the use of feeling blue?" he asked. "We're lost, that's sure
+enough, but we're in a civilized country, and we'll get home, or
+somewhere, sooner or later. Come on, let's have another try."
+
+"Then you can lead the way, I'll not," spoke John a little sharply.
+"I'm not going to be blamed again."
+
+"Oh, come now!" exclaimed Jack. "Don't mind what we said. Of course
+it wasn't your fault. It would happen to any one!"
+
+All that afternoon they traveled, until it was hard work to urge the
+horses on, as they were becoming tired. The boys spoke but seldom,
+and John seemed more glum than ever. Once or twice Jack tried to joke
+with him, but it was a failure. The half Indian lad was exhibiting
+some of the traits of his ancestors.
+
+Gradually it grew darker, until, with the thick fog, and the
+overhanging trees, it was almost like twilight.
+
+"How much further?" asked Nat.
+
+"I guess we can camp any time you want to," Jack said.
+
+"Do you think we are any further along the trail, or have we just
+traveled in a bigger circle?" Nat inquired.
+
+"Hard to say," replied Jack. "At any rate I don't see our old friend
+the queer tree. We must have ascended some for it's been up hill the
+last two hours."
+
+They found a well sheltered place, underneath a big clump of trees,
+that would serve as a canopy for themselves and the horses. The
+animals were tethered, after being allowed to feed on a patch of
+grass, and then they had supper. After the meal John seemed to be in
+better spirits, and took a more cheerful view of things.
+
+"I guess the fog will lift by morning," he said.
+
+But it did not, and, when the boys arose to prepare breakfast, after
+an uncomfortable night, the white curtain was thicker than ever.
+
+They traveled all that day, but, whether they made any real progress,
+or whether they went back or around in a circle, they could only
+surmise. They tried to keep ascending the mountain, and this was the
+only means they had of telling which way to go.
+
+"If we could only see something," said Nat, "it wouldn't be so
+lonesome. A fox, or a rabbit, or even a mountain lion. I don't
+believe I'd shoot one, I'd want his company."
+
+"I'm sorry I got you fellows into this scrape," Jack put in. "I'd go
+back with you, and begin over again, all alone, only I guess it would
+be just as bad to go back as it is to go ahead, so we might as well
+keep on."
+
+"Well, I reckon you'll not go on alone," said Nat, decidedly, and
+John, who had recovered his former good-natured, nodded in assent.
+
+As their horses stumbled on, once more the curtain of night began to
+descend, hastened by the thick fog. Would it never rise? How long
+were they to be hidden under the white vail?
+
+Suddenly, as they urged on their tired animals, a spear of light
+seemed to pierce the gathering gloom ahead of them. At the sight of
+it the horses threw up their heads and put forward their ears. The
+spear grew brighter. Then it pierced the mist. All at once a puff of
+wind brushed aside the white clinging wreaths of vapor that had so
+long enshrouded them. The fog rolled away, and there, in front of
+them was the setting sun, in a halo of glory. As it shone the beams
+were caught and reflected from a distant peak.
+
+"Golden Glow! Golden Glow!" cried Jack. "There is the mountain we
+have been searching for! Now to find my father!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXI
+
+JACK AND NAT PRISONERS
+
+
+The three travelers came to a halt on the shelf of a high cliff that
+towered above their heads. It was a wide and safe road they had
+emerged upon, and it could be seen winding on and up, until it was
+lost in the mist which was rapidly being driven forward by the wind.
+
+"There is the road to Golden Glow!" exclaimed Jack. "Come on. We are
+on the right trail now."
+
+"Better go easy," cautioned John. "It's getting night, and we can't
+travel far. Here's a good place to camp, and we can start early in
+the morning. I guess the fog has lifted to stay."
+
+Though Jack was impatient to press forward, he realized that what
+John said was sensible. He stood for awhile looking at the shifting
+light as it was reflected from the sun on the top of the lofty peak.
+He felt that at last he had reached the beginning of the end of his
+long search. Would it be successful? Would he find his father? Would
+he be in time to see him alive? All this Jack thought, and much more.
+
+Then the light faded as Old Sol sunk behind a mass of clouds, the
+stern mountains hiding his welcome face,
+
+"Now for supper!" cried Nat, in a more cheerful tone than any of the
+boys had used in the last two days. "I'm as hungry as a bear. I wish
+I had a nice fresh chicken--"
+
+Bang! It was John's gun that had been fired, and, before Nat could
+ask what the matter was he saw a plump bird fall to the ground, as
+the result of the Indian lad's quick aim.
+
+"I don't know whether it's a chicken or not," John said, "but it
+looks good to eat."
+
+And so the boys found it, though they did not know what kind of fowl
+it was. They fried it with crisp bacon, and with big tin cups of tea,
+as a change from coffee, they made a meal that caused them all to
+feel better.
+
+Jack could hardly start early enough the next morning, but the others
+insisted that he take time to eat a good breakfast. They were on the
+move again, almost before the sun had begun to tinge the mountain
+with the morning glow, arid they found the trail an easy one for
+several miles.
+
+It dipped down a bit, after one high shoulder of the range was
+passed, and then began a straight assent up to where they could see
+the peak they knew must be the Golden Glow, though it did not shine
+then. They camped at noon, and hurried on after a brief rest.
+
+Up and up they went until the shadows began to lengthen and they knew
+evening was approaching. Above their heads towered the high peak,
+and, as they rounded a turn they saw the top of the mountain suddenly
+seem to burst into flame above their head. The sun had again caught
+the mass of quartz and was reflecting from it.
+
+Now the trail turned. They had reached the highest point in the range
+where it was almost impossible to go further with horses. Jack, who
+was in the lead, pulled up his animal. Then, as he looked down he
+gave a cry.
+
+"There!" he exclaimed. "There is the stone Mr. Tevis told us about!"
+
+"Yes, and there is the cross carved upon it!" cried Nat.
+
+"Where is the tall pine tree?" asked John.
+
+"There!" came from Jack, and he pointed down the slope ahead of them.
+"It is just in line with that other peak!"
+
+The two boys looked to where he pointed. Sure enough, they saw the
+landmark Orion Tevis had mentioned.
+
+"To-morrow I may see my father!" said Jack in a low tone.
+
+Hardly had he spoken the words when there was a noise behind them,
+and the boys turned to see two horsemen riding up.
+
+At first the chums did not attach much significance to the appearance
+of the two riders. The men were coming on as fast as their horses
+could travel, but the boys thought they were ranchmen or herdsmen.
+
+"The two first ones! They're the ones we want!" exclaimed the
+foremost of the men, and at that Nat and Jack, who were in front of
+John, started. "Grab one Nate, and I'll tackle the other!"
+
+Before Nat and Jack could make a move to defend themselves they found
+a rope circling their arms just above their elbows. The men had cast
+their lariats and pinioned the boys. The resulting jerk nearly pulled
+them from their horses, but when the men saw this, they urged their
+steeds close to their captives, and held them in their saddle, while
+they deftly bound their hands.
+
+There was a clatter of hoofs at which Jack and Nat turned their
+heads. If they expected to see some one coming to rescue them they
+were disappointed, for all they beheld was John, swinging his horse
+around on the trail and making off at top speed.
+
+"Come back!" yelled one of the men, making a move as if to reach for
+his gun, but at this Jack wiggled so he had to give all his attention
+to the captive youth.
+
+"I'll come back--" yelled John, and the rest of what he said was lost
+in the clatter his horse made as it sprang over stones. Then John
+disappeared around a big ledge of rock.
+
+"Never mind," said one of the men, whom his companion had addressed
+as Nate. "We don't need him."
+
+"Guess not, Sid," was the reply. "We've got the main ones. He don't
+count."
+
+"What do you mean by this?" burst out Nat, who, as was Jack, had been
+so surprised by the sudden turn of events that he did not know what
+to say. "Who are you, anyhow?"
+
+"Now, don't get excited, sonny," spoke Nate. "This is a high
+altitude, remember, and you might bust a blood vessel. That would be
+too bad."
+
+"Yes, the fewer questions you ask the better off you'll be," put in
+Sid.
+
+"If my uncle hears of this you'll suffer for it," Nat went on. He
+thought the men might be cowboys out for a lark.
+
+"Don't worry, your uncle will never hear of it," Nate replied. "Now I
+guess we'll travel."
+
+There was nothing to do but to obey. The boys were fairly tied on
+their horses, so quickly and so deftly had the men used their ropes.
+
+"Did you get the rings?" asked Nate of his companion.
+
+"Almost forgot it," replied Sid. "I'll do it now."
+
+Before Jack was aware what the man was up to he had grabbed from his
+finger the curious moss agate emblem.
+
+"Here's one," exclaimed Sid. "Now for the other."
+
+He looked at both of Nat's hands.
+
+"Where's your ring?" he demanded.
+
+"Never had one," said Nat defiantly.
+
+"No fooling now, give it up or you'll be sorry."
+
+"I tell you I haven't got any," Nat replied impatiently. "You're up
+the wrong tree."
+
+"Give me that ring or I'll--" began Sid, when his companion broke in
+with:
+
+"Never mind now. It's getting late and we don't want to be caught out
+here at night. Bring him along. I guess we'll find a way to make him
+talk."
+
+Then, having seen that their captives were securely bound, the men
+attached long ropes to the bridles of the boys' horses, and led the
+animals back down the trail.
+
+The two men were some distance in advance, and, as the boys rode side
+by side, they had a chance to converse in low tones without being
+overheard by their captors.
+
+"Are they brigands, like you read about?" asked Nat.
+
+"Not much," replied Jack. "I think they are the same men who chased
+poor old Mr. Lantry, and shot him. I'm sure they are some of the bad
+men who tried to get my father, or else how would they know about the
+rings?"
+
+"They didn't get one from me," spoke Nat. "They must have made a
+mistake and got me instead of John. I say, Jack, you don't s'pose
+he's in with the gang, do you?"
+
+"What do you mean?"
+
+"He didn't lead us into a trap, did he? Bought off by the enemy, you
+know. He's part Indian, and you never can trust an Indian. Maybe
+these men hired him to fetch us this way. You know he acted sort of
+queer, lately."
+
+"Never!" said Jack, in as loud a whisper as he dared use without
+being overheard. "I'd trust John Smith with my life, Indian or no
+Indian. He's not in this game."
+
+"Then what made him run away and leave us?" asked Nat. "I don't call
+that sticking by your friends."
+
+"Maybe he went for help," suggested Nat.
+
+"I'll believe that when we see the help," Nat responded, in no gentle
+tones. "It looks queer."
+
+In fact the whole proceeding was a mystery to both boys. They could
+not imagine what the men would want to hold them captives for. Only
+Jack had an inkling. He believed the men were members of the band
+that had tried so long to get his father so they might play a trick
+on Mr. Tevis and gain the land. He believed they had been on his
+trail and that of his companions for some time, and had seized the
+first opportunity of capturing them. The seizure of his ring showed
+that, though he could not understand how they had mistaken Nat for
+John. However, that was natural, seeing the three boys were alike in
+general appearance, and Nat was almost as brown as John, from
+exposure to the sun.
+
+Down the trail for some miles the men led their captives and then
+they turned and ascended another way. The boys' hands and legs were
+beginning to get numb from the pressure of the thongs, and they were
+very tired. It was getting quite dark, but still they were led on.
+Suddenly, from the gathering darkness, there sounded a challenge:
+
+"Who's there?"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXII
+
+THE ESCAPE
+
+
+"Two kings," was the answer from one of the men.
+
+"What kings?" was the query.
+
+"King Nate and King Sid," replied the first named, "and they have two
+loyal subjects with them."
+
+"Let the kings and their subjects proceed," the unseen voice went on,
+and a moment later the boys found themselves in front of a sort of
+cave in the mountain side, from the depths of which a fire glowed,
+disclosing the figures and shadows of several men.
+
+"Had luck, eh?" asked some one, and Nate replied with a grunt, at the
+same time asking if "grub" was ready.
+
+"Of course it is," one of those grouped about the fire replied. "But
+you might tell us how you made out."
+
+"Couldn't be better," replied Sid. "We got the two boys and one of
+the rings. We don't need two. I guess I can fix up a duplicate that
+will fool Tevis."
+
+"What you going to do with the kids?" another man inquired. "They're
+going to be a nuisance."
+
+"No, they won't," Sid answered. "We'll keep 'em here until we get
+what we want, and then we'll turn 'em loose. I'm not going to harm
+'em."
+
+By this time several men had surrounded the captives. Jack and Nat
+could see that the cave was a large one, extending back some distance
+under the mountain. Far back was another fire, about which were one
+or two men. It looked like the mountain cavern of a band of brigands.
+
+"Take 'em inside," Sid ordered one of those in the group about Nat
+and Jack. "Take care of their horses and whatever they have about
+them. Then give 'em a bit of grub. I reckon they're hungry."
+
+The boys were grateful for the relief they experienced as their bonds
+were loosened and they were allowed to dismount from their horses.
+They were so stiff they could hardly walk and the men helped them,
+roughly, along over the rock-strewn entrance to the cavern. The boys
+were led inside the cave, and then, their guide turning sharply,
+conducted them into a sort of gallery branching off from the main
+one. There the lads found some animal skins on the floor, and were
+glad enough to lie down.
+
+Hung about the cave were several lanterns, and by the light of them
+the two lads could see they were in the power of a gang of rough men.
+There were a half dozen of the fellows and when the boys had
+stretched out on the skins in a corner, they gathered near the
+entrance to the inner cave for a conference. The boys could not hear
+what their captors were talking about, but that it concerned them
+seemed certain, as the men glanced frequently in the direction of the
+prisoners.
+
+"They must be planning something desperate," said Jack in a low tone.
+"Probably they're going to hurry to Orion Tevis and make trouble for
+him."
+
+"Do you think they'll hurt us?" asked Nat.
+
+"I don't believe so," Jack replied. "I think they want to keep us
+here until they can get at Mr. Tevis. Guess they'll have their own
+troubles though, finding him."
+
+Further conversation was interrupted by the approach of a man with
+some cold meat and chunks of bread. He also had a tin pail of water
+and two cups, and, though the meal was anything but a good one, Nat
+and Jack made the best of it, for they were hungry, and, though they
+were worried, they did not let it interfere with their appetites.
+
+If they had any hope of escaping that night they must have been
+disappointed as one of the gang was constantly on the watch, and the
+boys knew it would be useless to try to leave the cave.
+
+"I wonder where John is," said Nat, just before he fell asleep. "Why
+did he desert us?"
+
+"He hasn't deserted us," said Jack, speaking with conviction. "I'll
+bet he's gone for help."
+
+"Looked as if he was running away," remarked Nat, who had not lost
+the sudden distrust he felt on the Indian's part.
+
+In spite of their plight the boys slept well, and when morning came
+they were given some boiled eggs, bread and coffee, a meal, which, as
+Jack remarked, would have been a credit to a city hotel, to say
+nothing of a cave in the mountains. It made little difference, the
+boys thought, that the eggs were of some wild bird, and not of the
+domestic hen.
+
+After breakfast the man who had been addressed as Sid came to where
+the captives were, in the smaller cave.
+
+"If you boys will promise not to try to escape," he said, "I'll let
+you out for a breath of fresh air."
+
+"You mean not try to escape at all?" asked Jack.
+
+"That's what," Sid replied.
+
+"Then we'll stay here," announced Jack.
+
+"We're going to get away just as soon as possible, and the longer you
+keep us here the worse it will be for you."
+
+"My, but you have a quick temper," remarked Sid, not unkindly. "Well,
+I think I'll take a chance. You'll get sick if we keep you cooped up,
+and that isn't what we want. You can go out, but I warn you the first
+time you try to make a break for liberty you may get shot. Some of
+the men are pretty quick with a gun."
+
+"We'll go out, but we don't promise," Jack replied, as following Sid,
+he and Nat left the cave.
+
+Once outside the boys found there was little chance of getting away.
+There were half a dozen men about, all armed, and the camp was
+surrounded by a natural wall of high rock, which to any one crawling
+over presented difficulties that would delay him long enough to
+permit of capture. The entrance to the camp was guarded by a man with
+a rifle.
+
+But, what astonished the boys more than the appearance of the
+stronghold, was the work at which the men were engaged. This seemed
+to be mining, but of a kind the boys had heard very little about,
+though it is more or less common in the west.
+
+A man was directing a stream of water, from a big pipe against the
+side of a gravelly bank, and the dirt and fluid that washed down ran
+into a big sluiceway. This was formed of boards, there being a bottom
+and two sides. The top was open, but was braced with numerous cross
+pieces. The sluiceway was about four feet wide and three feet deep,
+and there was a great quantity of water flowing through it.
+
+Part of the sluiceway was wider and more shallow, and this part had,
+nailed across the bottom, narrow strips of wood, in the shape of
+cleats. They were placed to catch the heavier dirt, containing the
+gold, as it flowed down in the water.
+
+As the boys watched the stream was turned off, and men took from the
+cleats quantities of mingled muck and gravel, which they proceeded to
+"wash" to extract the gold.
+
+The boys were so interested in this that they forgot the plight they
+were in, and, almost, their desire to escape. They looked at the
+miners with their pans, as the men swirled them around to cause the
+water and dirt to flow over the edge and the gold to remain.
+ "Is it goin' to pay?" Jack heard one miner ask of another of the
+gang.
+
+"Don't look so," was the reply. "Yet they say there's a fortune
+locked up in that hill. An old hermit showed Sid the place, but it's
+been most a year since we repaired this old sluiceway which was here
+before we came and begun washing, and not more than enough to pay
+expenses have we had out of it. I'm gettin' tired."
+
+"Maybe there's better luck ahead."
+
+"How do you mean?"
+
+"Why in the capture of these kids. Didn't you hear Sid tell? He
+expects to get a hold on a fellow named Tevis now and maybe some rich
+timber lands that he's been after for ten years or more. There's a
+fellow named Ranger or Roberts mixed up in it, but Sid has never been
+able to land him, though he tried hard enough. Some of the boys
+nearly got Roberts' partner here not long ago, but he got away,
+though he was shot. Then Sid and Nate got on the trail of the boys,
+and here--"
+
+"Shut up!" exclaimed the other miner, as he noticed Jack and Nat
+taking in what his companion was saying. "They're too close now."
+
+At that the miners went on with their "washing" operations, and the
+two boys, pondering over what they had heard, walked away.
+
+"What do you think of that?" asked Nat, in a low voice.
+
+"Just as I expected," Jack rejoined. "I hope John brings us help in
+time to warn Mr. Tevis and help rescue my father. Maybe we could have
+a whack at this gold mine then."
+
+The boys were allowed to wander about the camp at will, but they
+noticed the men kept close watch over them. They were much interested
+in the sluiceway, and went to where they could see it stretching for
+a long distance down the mountain side.
+
+"Quite a piece of work," observed one of the men, a short, stocky,
+rather jolly looking individual, who seemed out of place in a gang of
+ruffians. "It runs for five miles," he went on, "all the way down to
+a big gulch they say, though I've never been to the end of it. It was
+built a long while ago, but we changed it a bit, and only use the
+upper end. We get our water from a little lake on the top of the
+mountain, and only the overflow goes down the sluiceway. Still that's
+enough," and he looked at the solid stream, flowing swiftly but
+silently between the heavy planks.
+
+"It would make a good shoot-the-chutes," observed Nat.
+
+"Rather risky," observed the miner. "You couldn't stop until you got
+to the end of it and it's a long ride. Have to look out for the cross
+pieces, too."
+
+A sudden light seemed to come into Jack's eyes as he turned away. He
+motioned to Nat to follow him, and, when they were out of earshot he
+whispered:
+
+"That's how we can escape."
+
+"How?" asked Nat in an excited whisper.
+
+"Wait," answered Jack, "Here comes Sid."
+
+"Haven't got away yet, eh?" the man asked with a sneer.
+
+"Not yet," was all Jack answered.
+
+That night, as he tossed restlessly on the pile of skins in the cave,
+Jack thought over a plan of getting away. It seemed practical enough,
+if he could only elude the vigilance of the men. But there was the
+hard part. He got up softly about midnight to see if he could sneak
+from the cave. No one was in sight. He called Nat and both crawled
+out into the open.
+
+"Now we're free!" whispered Jack. "Come on, Nat."
+
+"Where?"
+
+"Down the sluiceway. I know where there are two big planks."
+
+Leading the way, and keeping in the shadows as much as possible, Jack
+went to where two planks, each about seven feet long, lay near the
+boarded race.
+
+"We'll float down the sluiceway to freedom!" he cried, as he placed
+the plank on the edge of the flume. Nat did likewise, and, when Jack
+climbed over into the big oblong box, his companion followed. They
+had entered the sluiceway at a place where there was scarcely any
+current. Then they moved forward, crouching to avoid the cross
+pieces.
+
+"Here we go!" whispered Jack, throwing himself on the plank, an
+example which Nat followed. The next instant the two boys were being
+whirled down the sluiceway on top of the water at a swift pace. And,
+as they shot ahead they, heard a voice calling:
+
+"The kids have got away!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXIII
+
+DOWN THE SLUICEWAY
+
+
+Almost with the speed of an arrow from the bow the two boys flew
+forward on the swiftly-moving water in the sluiceway. The planks were
+submerged only a few inches, so great was the force of the current,
+and Jack and Nat, crouching on them as a boy goes sliding down hill
+on his sled, with his head between the points of the runners, felt
+themselves propelled forward with an irresistible power.
+
+At first it was so dark in the big box they could see nothing. Then,
+as their eyes grew accustomed to the gloom, they could note the sides
+of the flume slipping past them. A glance over their heads showed
+them the stars, and there was a confused blurr of the many cross-
+pieces.
+
+"Are you all right, Nat?" called Jack.
+
+"Sure," was the reply. "Say, it took my breath away at first, but
+it's all right now. This is going some!"
+
+Faster and faster the boys were whirled along. The water was
+beginning to chill them now, and they were wet through. Once or twice
+a sudden change in the direction of the sluiceway nearly brought them
+to grief, and on one occasion Nat slipped off his plank. It was
+floating away from him, but his cry warned Jack, who managed to stop
+it, while Nat struggled forward, stooping to avoid the braces, and
+secured it again.
+
+This occurred in a comparatively level place, where the current,
+after a quick descent, was not so rapid, otherwise there might have
+been a different ending to this story. For a mile farther the two
+boys floated along at an easy pace.
+
+"I guess we've left 'em behind," Nat observed. He was riding his
+plank alongside of Jack now, as the flume was broad enough to permit
+this.
+
+"Yes, but they're not going to give up so easily," Jack rejoined.
+"There's too much at stake. They'll chase us, but it's another thing
+to catch us. Hark! What's that?"
+
+From down below in the moonlit valley, into which the flume dipped
+there came a roaring sound. It was like a mighty wind blowing, and,
+as the boys were carried on and on, it increased in intensity.
+
+"Sounds like a waterfall," observed Nat.
+
+"So it does. I hope this flume doesn't do any stunts like that. We'll
+be dashed to pieces."
+
+"Maybe we'd better stop now, and get out," said Nat. "I wonder where
+we are?"
+
+"Haven't the least idea. We must have come about three miles though.
+Let's see if we can stop ourselves,"
+
+Owing to the fact that the cross-pieces were above and close to their
+heads, the boys could not peer over the edge of the flume. The water
+filled it to within a foot and a half of the edge, and they had to
+keep their heads well down.
+
+"Try and grab a cross-piece," said Jack. The sticks were about six
+feet apart.
+
+Nat cautiously raised his hand. His fingers brushed under the sides
+of several braces, but he had to move his arm up very slowly as a
+sudden contact with them would have broken his wrist. Jack was doing
+the same thing.
+
+The roar was growing louder now, and the water could be heard
+tumbling and crashing down.
+
+"The flume must be broken just below here!" cried Jack. "We must stop
+or we'll be killed!"
+
+He made a desperate effort to grasp a brace. He got his fingers on
+one. Then came a sudden rush of water, caused by a sharp decline in
+the level of the sluiceway, and Jack was torn from the cross-piece.
+At the same time his plank was swept from under him, and he was
+buried in an overwhelming rush of water. Over and over he was rolled
+along the bottom of the flume. Then he was tossed to the surface. For
+an instant he had a glimpse of Nat also struggling in the murky
+flood, on which the moon shone brilliantly.
+
+[Illustration: JACK WAS SHOT FORWARD AS THOUGH FROM A CATAPULT.]
+
+The next instant Jack was shot forward as though from a catapult,
+feet foremost, and, as he fought and struggled to get his breath, he
+saw that he was in the midst of a giant waterspout, as it leaped from
+the end of the broken flume and plunged, like a stream from an
+immense hose, into a swirling pool which the freed sluice water had
+dug in the soft soil.
+
+Forward and down went Jack, and, though it seemed like an hour while
+he was being shot out with the water as it spurted from where the
+flume was raised on a high trestle, it was only a second or two
+before he was plunged into the pool.
+
+As he sank down and down the lad was aware of a splash close beside
+him, and he dimly thought it must be Nat. And so it proved. Nat,
+also, had been spouted from the flume into the pool, and, when Jack,
+after a fierce fight with the bubbling water came to the surface and
+began swimming, he saw Nat bob up a moment later. Both boys worked to
+get away from the plunging stream.
+
+"Are--you--hurt?" asked Jack, pantingly.
+
+"No--are--you?" inquired Nat.
+
+"Nope! Wonder--what--sort of--a place--this--is."
+
+"Kind--of--wet," remarked Nat, and, in spite of his peril Jack could
+not help smiling.
+
+When the water had cleared from their eyes the boys saw they were in
+the midst of a miniature lake. It was formed of the water that
+escaped from the broken pool, and had filled a big hole, a sort of
+basin on a ledge of the mountain. They struck out for the nearest
+shore, reaching it after some little difficulty, for their wet
+clothing hampered them.
+
+Reaching the bank they crawled out, for the little lake shoaled
+rapidly, and shook themselves like big dogs to get rid of what water
+they could. Then they turned to gaze at the curious scene.
+
+Before them was quite a large sheet of water. Right to the edge of it
+came the flume trestle, and it could be seen, in the moonlight, where
+it had broken off. Beyond the lake, on the other side, the sluiceway
+continued on, but there was a gap of several hundred feet.
+
+"Looks as though there was less water coming down," said Nat, as he
+began taking off his outer clothing to wring it out.
+
+"That's so," agreed Jack.
+
+As they stood looking at the spurting water it was perceptibly
+diminishing. The volume was greatly decreased from that which had
+shot them into the lake. Rapidly it grew less until it stopped
+altogether.
+
+"What made that, I wonder," came from Nat.
+
+"They probably shut it off at the mine," Jack replied. "They think
+they can strand us in the flume. Lucky they didn't try it sooner."
+
+This, as the boys learned later, was what had been done. When the
+news of their escape was known several of the gang started in
+pursuit. They kept it up for awhile, until some one suggested
+shutting off the flow of the stream by means of a gate in the
+sluiceway.
+
+"Well, now we're here, what's to be done?" asked Nat.
+
+"Get rid of some of this water," suggested Jack, "and then see if we
+can't find a place to stay until morning."
+
+The boys wrung as much of the fluid as possible from their clothes,
+and then, donning the damp garments, looked to see in which direction
+it would be best to travel. As Jack was looking about for some sign
+of a trail, he gave a cry of astonishment.
+
+"See!" he exclaimed. "There is Golden Glow!"
+
+There, back in the direction of the flume, towered a high peak. As
+the moonbeams rested on it they were reflected back from the shining
+top, just as the sun rays had been, only in a less degree.
+
+ "This must be the valley where my father has his cabin," he said.
+"It is in line with the mountain, and, I remember it was in this
+direction we were looking when the men captured us. Oh Nat! Perhaps I
+shall soon find him. Come on. Mr. Tevis said it was at the end of the
+valley. I am going to find him! Hurry, Nat!"
+
+But Nat needed no urging. He followed close after Jack, who was
+moving around the edge of the lake, to reach the other part of the
+broken flume. There was no path, but the way was comparatively
+smooth.
+
+As the boys passed under the sluiceway trestle Jack exclaimed:
+
+"See, here is a sort of path, and it leads right up the valley. We
+are on the right road."
+
+"Be careful," cautioned Nat. "Remember what Mr. Tevis said about men
+shooting first and inquiring afterward in this country."
+
+"I am going to find my father," was Jack's answer, as he hurried on.
+
+The boys forgot their wet clothes. They forgot their recent peril,
+and their escape from the bad men. They thought of nothing but what
+might be before them. They had traveled about two hours. The valley
+was growing darker as the moon was sinking lower and lower behind the
+cliffs. All at once Jack, who was in the lead, stopped. He pointed
+ahead to a dark shadow.
+
+"See; there is a cabin," he whispered.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXIV
+
+JACK'S GREAT FIND
+
+
+For a moment the boys stood still, contemplating the small log
+building, which was now but dimly visible. All was silent about it.
+There was no sign of life. Was it occupied? Was Jack's father there?
+
+These were questions that flashed through the mind of the two lads as
+they stood there in the darkness. Then Jack, with a long-drawn
+breath, that showed how great was the strain on him, whispered:
+
+"Let's see if any one is there."
+
+Cautiously they moved forward, stopping every now and then to listen.
+But no sound came to them. The cabin remained as dark and as silent
+as when they first saw it. Foot by foot they moved nearer, until Jack
+was so close he could put out his hand and touch the door. He knocked
+loudly, and the echo sounded almost like thunder in the quiet night-
+enshrouded valley.
+
+But no answer came, though the boys waited several minutes. Then Jack
+pushed on the door. It opened, with a squeaking of hinges that must
+have alarmed any occupant, unless deaf. No challenge came, and the
+two lads stepped inside.
+
+"Look out where you're going," said Nat. "Hold your hands in front of
+you, and feel with your feet. You may tumble down a hole."
+
+Jack did as directed, and, a moment later, his outstretched hand
+knocked over something that fell with a crash to the floor.
+
+"What's that?" exclaimed Nat, in a startled whisper.
+
+"Candlestick and candle," replied Jack, as he stooped down and picked
+up what he had knocked down. "Matches too," he added, as he found
+them scattered over the floor.
+
+An instant later he had struck a light, and in the gleam of the
+tallow dip the boys saw they were inside a comfortably furnished
+cabin. It consisted of two rooms, one a sort of kitchen and general
+sitting apartment, and the other a bedroom, with two bunks against
+the wall. There was a rough table, a few chairs and a fireplace.
+Cooking utensils scattered about, and the appearance of the bunk
+room, showed it had been lately occupied.
+
+"I wonder if my father could have lived here," Jack remarked. "Where
+can he have gone to? Perhaps he is dead."
+
+"Must have been some one here recently," said Nat. "That food looks
+fresh."
+
+He pointed to some roast beef on the table, and to some slices of
+bread.
+
+"It looks good enough to eat," Jack said, "and I'm going to tackle
+it, for I'm as hungry as a bear, and cold, too," for the ducking was
+beginning to tell on him.
+
+The boys made a rude but satisfactory meal, and, building a fire on
+the hearth, with some dry wood in the cabin, they made their clothing
+more comfortable. They had just donned their dry garments, when Jack,
+looking from the door of the shack, said:
+
+"Hello, it's almost morning. The sun is beginning to rise." There was
+a faint light in the east, over the tops of the mountains.
+
+"Yes, and some one is coming up the valley," remarked Nat, as he
+peered over Jack's shoulder.
+
+The two boys saw, walking slowly along the trail that led to the
+cabin, the dim figure of a man. Over his shoulder he carried a gun,
+and, as he approached, he stopped every few feet to listen, the while
+regarding the cabin intently. It was growing lighter every minute,
+and the boys could see him quite well.
+
+Suddenly, when the man was within a hundred yards of the shack, he
+dropped to one knee, and leveled the gun straight at the opened cabin
+door:
+
+"Who's there?" he cried. "Speak or I'll fire!"
+
+Jack, who was in the center of the portal, uttered an exclamation. He
+caught his breath sharply. Then, as the sun, mounting nearer the
+mountain tops, threw more light into the valley, showing clearly the
+figure of the crouching man, Jack cried:
+
+"Father! Father! It's me! It's your son Jack!"
+
+He was about to rush toward the figure, which he recognized from his
+aunts' description as that of his parent, when the voice of the man
+halted him:
+
+"If you come a step nearer I'll fire!" the kneeling one exclaimed.
+"I've been fooled too often to have any tricks played on me now. I
+know you. You are members of the gang that has been hounding me so
+many years. But my time is almost up. Stand back or I'll fire!"
+
+"Father! Father!" cried Jack. "Your time is up now. I have come to
+take you back with me!"
+
+"Who is this, who says he is my son?" the man asked, his rifle
+trembling. "My son is thousands of miles away from here. You can't
+deceive me again."
+
+"But I am your son! Your Jack!" the boy cried, hardly knowing what to
+do. "See I have the ring--"
+
+Then he stopped, for he remembered that his ring had been stolen from
+him.
+
+"What is that about a ring?" asked the kneeling man.
+
+With a quick motion Jack pulled from his pocket the golden lizard
+with the ruby eyes which Mr. Tevis had given him. He threw it toward
+his father, and it fell near the man.
+
+"What is that?" the latter asked.
+
+"Look at it," exclaimed Jack. "It will prove who I am. It is from Mr.
+Tevis. See, don't you recognize me?"
+
+The old man, still keeping his eyes fixed on the cabin, and his gun
+in readiness, rose to his feet and, going forward, picked up the
+golden charm. As he caught sight of it he uttered a cry.
+
+At the same time Jack, who had been standing in the shadow of the
+door, stepped into the morning light. The man, with a sudden motion,
+threw aside his gun. He ran toward Jack, who sprang forward to meet
+him. The next moment father and son were locked in each other's arms.
+
+"Jack! Jack!" exclaimed Mr. Ranger. "I was afraid I would never see
+you again."
+
+"I'm so glad I've found you at last, father," murmured the boy, while
+his eyes filled with tears. Nat suddenly developed a bad cold, and
+had to blow his nose so violently that Mr. Ranger's attention was
+attracted to him.
+
+"Who's there?" he asked, in startled tones.
+
+"It's only Nat," Jack said. "Come Nat, and see my father. He's the
+best prize exhibit I ever had."
+
+There was such an interchange of talk among the three a moment later
+that the best stenographer would have found himself at a disadvantage
+in taking it down. Jack and Nat told as much as possible of their
+trip from the time they started until they escaped by the sluiceway,
+and Mr. Ranger told how he had been watching in vain all night at the
+end of the trail for the return of old Mr. Lantry. He had done so for
+the last few nights, he said, as he was afraid to go far away in the
+daytime.
+
+He was much surprised to learn of his partner being pursued by the
+bad men, and startled to hear that the scoundrels were so near his
+hiding place. He said he had been much startled, on his return from
+his night vigil, to see lights inside his cabin.
+
+"But now you must come home with me," said Jack, when there came a
+lull in the talk. "The time limit has nearly expired and you will be
+safe back in civilization."
+
+"Yes, I guess my long exile has ended," said Mr. Ranger. "At any rate
+I must leave here. The rascals may find me at any moment, when they
+come down after you."
+
+Jack agreed with his father it would be best to leave the locality.
+Mr. Ranger said he could depart from the valley by a little-used
+trail, and come out on the one that led to the ranch of Nat's uncle.
+It would be slow going, without horses, he said, but they decided to
+try it.
+
+Accordingly they began to pack up what few belongings Mr. Ranger
+wanted to take away with him. There was a simple camping outfit in
+the cabin, and plenty of food, so they would not suffer hunger on
+their way.
+
+"I have but a little of the heart-medicine left," said Mr. Ranger. "I
+got two or three bad spells the last few days, and had to take
+considerable of it. But perhaps I will be all right until we get to a
+town, if we go slowly."
+
+At last all was in readiness for the start. Each one bore a small
+pack, and Mr. Ranger had his rifle. Jack insisted that his father
+take the lightest of the camp stuff, while he and Nat shouldered the
+most of it and the food.
+
+With a last look at the cabin, that had sheltered him for the last
+few years, Mr. Ranger turned to go. Then he exclaimed:
+
+"I almost forgot my bag of gold."
+
+"Your bag of gold?" asked Jack.
+
+"Yes, it is all I have to show for my stay here. I have managed to
+live, and that is all. My partner and I got a little gold from the
+washings that came down the flume, but we had to spend most of it to
+live. I have only a few ounces left."
+
+He was about to go back into the cabin when a cry from Nat warned
+him:
+
+"Some one is coming!" the boy explained.
+
+The next instant a group of horsemen swept forward around a turn in
+the trail, straight for the cabin!
+
+"Here come the bad men!" yelled Jack. "Come on father!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXV
+
+THE ROUND-UP--CONCLUSION
+
+
+Mr. Ranger ran back to join his son. At the same time Nat and Jack
+sprang forward, and together the three raced down the valley. With
+loud shouts the horsemen pursued them.
+
+"Here they are!" some of the riders exclaimed. "We'll get the boys
+and the old man, too! Come on!"
+
+For a little while the three fugitives, from the start they had, and
+from the rough nature of the ground, which precluded speed on the
+part of the horses, kept in the lead. They had just made a turn in
+the trail, which, for a moment hid the horsemen from sight, when Mr.
+Ranger exclaimed:
+
+"I can go no farther, Jack. My heart! Oh, my heart!"
+
+He sank down, staggering under the weight of his rifle.
+
+"Quick!" cried Nat. "Get behind this big rock! Maybe we can hold 'em
+off!"
+
+The two boys half carried Mr. Ranger around to the rear of an immense
+boulder that bordered the trail. Then Jack ran hack and caught up the
+rifle. He had just time enough to spring hack of the rock when the
+riders swept fully into view. Jack leveled the rifle over the top of
+the big stone and cried:
+
+"Don't come any nearer or I'll shoot!"
+
+The riders pulled up in confusion.
+
+"Go ahead!" cried those in the rear,
+
+"He's got the drop on us!" exclaimed those in front.
+
+Jack held the rifle steady. For several seconds there was an intense
+strain. Mr. Ranger was resting his head on Nat's knee, panting for
+breath.
+
+"You'll--find--some medicine--in--my pocket," he gasped, and Nat,
+searching where the sick man indicated, found a small bottle of white
+pills. He gave Mr. Ranger one, and, in a few seconds the color came
+back to the sufferer's pale face.
+
+Now there was a movement among the horsemen. Some of them rode back
+on the trail, while others dismounted and went to the left and right.
+
+"They're going to surround us," Jack thought. "I guess it's all up
+with us!"
+
+He kept close watch of the men he could see. Those directly in front
+of him remained on their horses.
+
+Suddenly there sounded a confused shouting from back on the trail.
+Dimly Jack tried to recall where he had heard those voices before. He
+glanced along the rifle barrel which was trembling like a leaf in the
+wind.
+
+Then there came a fulisade of shots, mingling with the shouts. The
+approaching horsemen seemed thrown into confusion. One or two of the
+steeds went down in heaps, throwing their riders. The shooting and
+yelling continued.
+
+All at once there galloped into view a band of cowboys. At their head
+rode John Smith and Nat's uncle. Both were firing their revolvers as
+fast as they could.
+
+"Hurrah!" cried Nat. "We're saved!"
+
+"Just in time!" muttered Jack, as, weak and shaking, he dropped the
+rifle and sprang to his father's side.
+
+There was a short, sharp struggle between the armed force from the
+ranch and the bad men. Some of the scoundrels got away, but the
+majority were rounded up. In the melee some were hurt.
+
+"Are you all right?" asked John, as dust-covered and powder-begrimed
+he sprang to clasp his chums by the hands.
+
+"Thanks to you, yes," said Nat heartily, and he was ashamed of the
+brief suspicion with which he had regarding the Indian. "How did you
+do it?"
+
+"As soon as I saw you captured, I knew I could do more good free than
+a prisoner with you," John said. "I made the best time I could to the
+ranch, and I guess all the cowboys who could be spared came back as
+fast as their horses could carry them. We easily traced the gang to
+here, and,--well you saw the rest."
+
+The cowboys, even Cactus Ike, who had played the horse trick on Jack,
+were busy binding their prisoners on their horses. Mr. Kent was so
+excited he did not know what to do. He insisted on shaking hands with
+Jack, Nat, John and Mr. Ranger every other minute. As for Jack's
+father, he soon felt better because of the medicine, and when the
+securing of the prisoners was completed, he found he was able to
+mount a spare horse and proceed.
+
+It was decided to take an easy trail, some of the cowboys knew of,
+back to a place near where the boys had been held captive, and about
+noon the cavalcade reached the cave near the mine, from which the
+lads had escaped.
+
+But a great change had taken place. The breaking of the flume, and
+the shutting off of the water had backed up the stream, which had
+been allowed to run all night, and in consequence, the whole surface
+of the hill, against which the hydraulic operations had been
+directed, was washed away.
+
+It was difficult to get the horses past it, for there was a big hole.
+As Mr. Ranger was passing the spot where the band had so lately been
+at work, he looked at the ground, and uttered a sudden exclamation.
+Then he jumped from his horse and began digging in the dirt.
+
+"What is it?" asked Jack in some alarm.
+
+"Gold! Gold! Gold!" cried Mr. Ranger. "See it sparkle! Here is a mine
+of wonderful wealth! The water uncovered it, or they might have
+worked for years without discovering it. See the gold!"
+
+In another instant the cowboys were off their horses examining the
+find. Mr. Kent looked at it critically.
+
+"Well, this is luck!" he said. "It's an ill wind that blows nobody
+good!"
+
+There was a hurried consultation, which resulted in some of the men
+being left on guard, while the others proceeded to the ranch with the
+prisoners, the boys and Mr. Ranger.
+
+There were three days making the trip, owing to the fact that Mr.
+Ranger had to ride slowly. As he descended from the higher altitudes,
+however, he got stronger. When the ranch was reached, the physicians
+who had been attending old Mr. Lantry, prescribed for the former
+exile, and took charge of him.
+
+The members of the band from one of whom Jack's ring was taken, were
+sent to jail, under a strong escort, and, eventually were given long
+terms. As soon as Mr. Kent and his men, including the boys and Mr.
+Ranger, had proved their claim to the mine, arrangements for working
+it were made. It turned out even better than it had appeared at the
+first glance, so that every one interested received a large sum.
+
+As for Jack he could not bear to let his father out of his sight. Mr.
+Ranger, too, wanted to be with his son all the while. The return of
+the exile had such a good effect on Mr. Lantry that he recovered much
+sooner than the doctor had expected, having regained his senses from
+the delirium, the day after Mr. Ranger reached the ranch. The old man
+was given some shares in the mine, enough to keep him comfortably.
+
+Then it was that the boys really began to enjoy life. The long sunny
+days on the plains, riding here and there, soon restored Mr. Ranger
+to ruddy health, and the physician pronounced him almost cured of his
+heart ailment.
+
+The boys spent happy hours on the ranch, entering into friendly
+contests in everything from roping a steer to saddling a frisky
+horse. The cowboys could not show them enough attention, and Cactus
+Ike even apologized to Jack for the trick he played on him. Jack
+forgave him, and said it had probably learned him more about a horse
+in ten minutes than he could otherwise have picked up in a week.
+
+It was some time after this, when, as they were all seated on the
+porch, one warm evening, that Jack remarked:
+
+"Well, we'll have to be getting back east, soon."
+
+"How good that sounds," said Mr. Ranger. "I was afraid I might never
+see the east again. Yes, we must go back soon. I am anxious to see my
+sisters."
+
+"Sorry to have you go," said Mr. Kent. "There's no place like the
+west."
+
+"Perhaps not, for a young man," Mr. Ranger admitted, "but I'm getting
+old."
+
+"I wonder if we'll ever again have adventures like those we
+experienced out here," said Nat "Lannigan's lassoes! But we certainly
+had some sport!"
+
+"Maybe not the same kind, but I s'pose they'll be just as exciting,"
+Jack remarked. "We seem to run into 'em."
+
+The boys did have more adventures, and, what they were will be
+related in the next volume of this series, to be called, "Jack
+Ranger's School Victories; Or, Track, Gridiron and Diamond."
+
+A week later Jack, his father, Nat and John started east. They
+stopped on the way to see Mr. Tevis, who expressed his delight that
+Mr. Ranger's period of exile was over, that the bad men had been put
+where they could do no more harm, and that the unexpectedly
+discovered mine had panned out so well.
+
+"You are to be congratulated on having such a son as Jack," said Mr.
+Tevis to Mr. Ranger.
+
+"If it hadn't been for John and Nat I guess I wouldn't have had much
+success," Jack remarked.
+
+"Now that I look at it, I cannot understand how those men had such an
+influence on me," said Mr. Ranger, thoughtfully.
+
+"I'll tell you what I believe," answered Jack. "One of them was
+something of a hypnotist. He tried his game on me when I was at the
+cave."
+
+"It may be that you are right, my son. It is true that I was afraid
+of them--and just why I cannot tell," returned Mr. Ranger. "But that
+is a thing of the past now," he added, with satisfaction.
+
+"And now for home!" cried Nat, the next day. "Won't we have lots to
+tell when we get there!"
+
+"I'll be glad to see Washington Hall again," said John.
+
+"Yes, indeed!" answered Jack. "But I'm going home to Denton first,
+and you must come along, John."
+
+"Very well, I will," said the semi-Indian youth.
+
+Twelve hours later the happy party was on its way to the nearest
+railroad station. And here, bound for home, we will leave them.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's Jack Ranger's Western Trip, by Clarence Young
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JACK RANGER'S WESTERN TRIP ***
+
+This file should be named 7496.txt or 7496.zip
+
+Produced by Charles Franks
+
+Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance
+of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing.
+Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections,
+even years after the official publication date.
+
+Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til
+midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement.
+The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at
+Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A
+preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment
+and editing by those who wish to do so.
+
+Most people start at our Web sites at:
+https://gutenberg.org or
+http://promo.net/pg
+
+These Web sites include award-winning information about Project
+Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new
+eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!).
+
+
+Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement
+can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is
+also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the
+indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an
+announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter.
+
+http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or
+ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03
+
+Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90
+
+Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want,
+as it appears in our Newsletters.
+
+
+Information about Project Gutenberg (one page)
+
+We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The
+time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours
+to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright
+searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our
+projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value
+per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2
+million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text
+files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+
+We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002
+If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total
+will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end.
+
+The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks!
+This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers,
+which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users.
+
+Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated):
+
+eBooks Year Month
+
+ 1 1971 July
+ 10 1991 January
+ 100 1994 January
+ 1000 1997 August
+ 1500 1998 October
+ 2000 1999 December
+ 2500 2000 December
+ 3000 2001 November
+ 4000 2001 October/November
+ 6000 2002 December*
+ 9000 2003 November*
+10000 2004 January*
+
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created
+to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people
+and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut,
+Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois,
+Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts,
+Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New
+Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio,
+Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South
+Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West
+Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming.
+
+We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones
+that have responded.
+
+As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list
+will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states.
+Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state.
+
+In answer to various questions we have received on this:
+
+We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally
+request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and
+you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have,
+just ask.
+
+While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are
+not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting
+donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to
+donate.
+
+International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about
+how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made
+deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are
+ways.
+
+Donations by check or money order may be sent to:
+
+Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+PMB 113
+1739 University Ave.
+Oxford, MS 38655-4109
+
+Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment
+method other than by check or money order.
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by
+the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN
+[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are
+tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising
+requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be
+made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+You can get up to date donation information online at:
+
+https://www.gutenberg.org/donation.html
+
+
+***
+
+If you can't reach Project Gutenberg,
+you can always email directly to:
+
+Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com>
+
+Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message.
+
+We would prefer to send you information by email.
+
+
+**The Legal Small Print**
+
+
+(Three Pages)
+
+***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START***
+Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers.
+They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with
+your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from
+someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our
+fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement
+disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how
+you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to.
+
+*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK
+By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
+eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept
+this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive
+a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by
+sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person
+you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical
+medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request.
+
+ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS
+This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks,
+is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart
+through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project").
+Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright
+on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and
+distribute it in the United States without permission and
+without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth
+below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook
+under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark.
+
+Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market
+any commercial products without permission.
+
+To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable
+efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain
+works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any
+medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other
+things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
+intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged
+disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer
+codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
+
+LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES
+But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below,
+[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may
+receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims
+all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including
+legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR
+UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT,
+INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE
+OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of
+receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any)
+you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that
+time to the person you received it from. If you received it
+on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and
+such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement
+copy. If you received it electronically, such person may
+choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to
+receive it electronically.
+
+THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS
+TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
+PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or
+the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the
+above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you
+may have other legal rights.
+
+INDEMNITY
+You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation,
+and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated
+with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
+texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including
+legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the
+following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook,
+[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook,
+or [3] any Defect.
+
+DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm"
+You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by
+disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this
+"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg,
+or:
+
+[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this
+ requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the
+ eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however,
+ if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable
+ binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form,
+ including any form resulting from conversion by word
+ processing or hypertext software, but only so long as
+ *EITHER*:
+
+ [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and
+ does *not* contain characters other than those
+ intended by the author of the work, although tilde
+ (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may
+ be used to convey punctuation intended by the
+ author, and additional characters may be used to
+ indicate hypertext links; OR
+
+ [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at
+ no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent
+ form by the program that displays the eBook (as is
+ the case, for instance, with most word processors);
+ OR
+
+ [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at
+ no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the
+ eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC
+ or other equivalent proprietary form).
+
+[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this
+ "Small Print!" statement.
+
+[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the
+ gross profits you derive calculated using the method you
+ already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you
+ don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are
+ payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation"
+ the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were
+ legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent
+ periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to
+ let us know your plans and to work out the details.
+
+WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO?
+Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of
+public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
+in machine readable form.
+
+The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time,
+public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses.
+Money should be paid to the:
+"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or
+software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at:
+hart@pobox.com
+
+[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only
+when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by
+Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be
+used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be
+they hardware or software or any other related product without
+express permission.]
+
+*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END*
+
diff --git a/7496.zip b/7496.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96860d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/7496.zip
Binary files differ
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4695830
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #7496 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/7496)